Sei sulla pagina 1di 278

Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer

User Manual

Canada
A DIVISION OF AMETEK PROCESS & ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS
PN 903-8726, Rev G Western Research
Offices
For other offices not listed here, visit us at www.ametekpi.com.
USA – HEADQUARTERS FRANCE
150 Freeport Road AMETEK – APIF
Pittsburgh, PA 15238, USA Rond point de l’epine des champs
Tel: 412-828-9040 Buroplus Bat D
Toll Free: 800-537-6044 78990 Elancourt, France
Fax: 412-826-0399 Tel: 33-1-30-68-89-20
USA – Delaware Fax: 33-1-30-68-89-29
455 Corporate Boulevard CHINA
Newark, DE 19702, USA AMETEK Commercial Enterprise (Shanghai) Co. Ltd.
Tel: 302-456-4400 (Main) Part A First Floor, 460 North
800-537-6044 (Service) Fute Road
800-222-6789 (Ordering) Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone
Fax: 302-456-4444 Shanghai, 200131, China
USA – Texas Tel: 86-21-5868-5111
4903 West Sam Houston Parkway North Fax: 86-28-5866-0969
Suite A-400 Beijing Branch
Houston, TX 77041, USA Tel: 86-10-8526-2111
Tel: 713-466-4900 Fax: 86-10-8526-2141
Toll Free: 1-800-634-8990 Chengdu Branch
Fax: 713-849-1924 Tel: 86-28-8675-8111
CANADA Fax: 86-28-8675-8141
AMETEK Canada Guangzhou Branch
2876 Sunridge Way N.E. Tel: 86-20-8363-4768
Calgary, AB, T1Y 7H9, Canada Fax: 86-20-8363-3701
Tel: 403-235-8400 MIDDLE EAST – Dubai
Toll Free: 800-661-9198 P.O. Box 17067
Fax: 403-248-3550 Jebel Ali Free Zone
INDIA Dubai, UAE
AMETEK Instruments India Pvt. Ltd. Tel: 971-4-881-2052
1st Floor, Prestige Featherlite Tech Park Fax: 971-4-881-2053
Plot 148, EPIP Phase II SINGAPORE
Whitefield, Bengaluru – 560066, Karnataka, India AMETEK Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Tel: 91-80-6782-3200 No. 43, Changi South
Fax: 91-80-6782-3232 Avenue 2, #04-01
GERMANY 486164 Singapore
AMETEK GmbH Tel: 65-6486-2388
Rudolf-Diesel Strasse 16 Fax: 65-6481-6588
D-40670 Meerbusch, Germany
Tel: 49-2159-9136-0
Fax: 49-2159-9136-39

© 2012–2018 AMETEK Canada, A Division of AMETEK Process & Analytical Instruments Printed in Canada
This manual is a guide for the use of the Model 9900 Analyzer. Data herein has been verified and validated and is believed adequate for the intended use
of this instrument. If the instrument or procedures are used for purposes over and above the capabilities specified herein, confirmation of their validity and
suitability should be obtained; otherwise, AMETEK does not guarantee results and assumes no obligation or liability. This publication is not a license to
operate under, or a recommendation to infringe upon, any process patents.

ii | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Contents
Offices................................................................................................................................... ii
Safety Notes......................................................................................................................viii
Electrical Safety.................................................................................................................viii
Grounding.........................................................................................................................viii
Personnel and Equipment Safety Information.............................................................. ix
Warnings....................................................................................................................... ix
Cautions......................................................................................................................... x
Warning Labels................................................................................................................... xi
Environmental Information............................................................................................. xi
UV Source Lamps Disposal.............................................................................................. xi
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)........................................................................... xii
Special Warnings and Information................................................................................ xiii
Equipment Used in Haza­­rdous Locations............................................................ xiii
EU Declaration of Conformity....................................................................................... xiv
Warranty and Claims....................................................................................................... xvi

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 1-1


Theory of Operation........................................................................................................ 1-1
The Implementation................................................................................................. 1-2
Bench Controller Board............................................................................................ 1-3
Customer I/O Board.................................................................................................. 1-3
Optical Bench............................................................................................................. 1-4
Sample System........................................................................................................... 1-5
Sample Flow..........................................................................................................1-5
Analyzer Electronics and Sample System Features.................................................... 1-6
Working in This Manual................................................................................................. 1-8
Supplemental Information – Where Can I Find It?.................................................... 1-9

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................ 2-1


Methodology..................................................................................................................... 2-2
Standard Ranges........................................................................................................ 2-2
Analyzer Specifications................................................................................................... 2-3
Number of UV Species............................................................................................. 2-3
Response Time........................................................................................................... 2-3
Accuracy...................................................................................................................... 2-3
Repeatability............................................................................................................... 2-3
Linearity...................................................................................................................... 2-3
Stability........................................................................................................................ 2-3
Cross-Talk.................................................................................................................... 2-4
Temperature Drift...................................................................................................... 2-4
24-Hour Zero Drift.................................................................................................... 2-4
Pressure and Temperature Compensation (Optional)........................................ 2-4
Communication......................................................................................................... 2-5
Customer Outputs..................................................................................................... 2-5

Contents | iii
Customer Inputs........................................................................................................ 2-5
Supply Voltage.......................................................................................................2-6
Power Consumption..............................................................................................2-6
Measuring Cell Construction.................................................................................. 2-6
Sample Gas Requirements....................................................................................... 2-6
Sample System Pressure Limits............................................................................... 2-6
Flow Measurement (Optional)................................................................................ 2-7
Sample Gas Flow Rate.............................................................................................. 2-7
Zero Fluid................................................................................................................... 2-7
Storage Conditions.................................................................................................... 2-7
Operating Conditions............................................................................................... 2-7
Ambient Operating Temperature..........................................................................2-7
Humidity...............................................................................................................2-7
Maximum Altitude...............................................................................................2-8
Ingress Protection..................................................................................................2-8
Physical Dimensions................................................................................................. 2-8
Electrical Classifications............................................................................................ 2-8
Analyzer Certificates and Marking............................................................................... 2-9
CSA Certificate, Hazardous Locations................................................................... 2-9
CSA Certificate, Ordinary Locations.................................................................... 2-11
ATEX Certificate....................................................................................................... 2-13
IECEx Certificate...................................................................................................... 2-15
Analyzer Marking.................................................................................................... 2-19

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND START-UP.................................................................... 3-1


Safety Considerations...................................................................................................... 3-2
Pre-Installation Requirements....................................................................................... 3-2
Storage Prior to Installation..................................................................................... 3-2
Uncrating and Inspecting the Analyzer................................................................. 3-2
Tools, Equipment and Supplies Required for Installation.................................. 3-3
Installing the Mechanical Components........................................................................ 3-4
Installing the Analyzer.............................................................................................. 3-4
Location and Environment....................................................................................3-4
Installing the Sample System.................................................................................. 3-8
Sample Prerequisites..............................................................................................3-8
Installing and Connecting the Sample and Vent Lines.........................................3-9
Connecting the Zero Gas....................................................................................... 3-10
Digital Communication.......................................................................................... 3-11
Connections for Modbus® RTU on the RS-485..................................................3-11
Connections for Modbus® TCP on Ethernet (Optional).....................................3-12
Removing/Replacing the USB Flash Drive.........................................................3-12
Connecting I/O Signals, Relay Contacts, and AC Power......................................... 3-14
Input/Output Signal and Relay Contact Connections...................................... 3-14
AC Power Connection............................................................................................. 3-16
General Purpose (GP) Applications....................................................................3-16
Division 2/Zone 2 Applications..........................................................................3-16
Pressure Leak Check...................................................................................................... 3-20

iv | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Start-Up and Verification.............................................................................................. 3-21
Powering Up the Analyzer..................................................................................... 3-21
Start-Up Diagnostics Checklist.............................................................................. 3-26
Recalibrating the Analyzer..................................................................................... 3-27
Normal Operation.......................................................................................................... 3-28
Monitoring Analyzer Performance....................................................................... 3-28
Recording Initial Sample Response Time............................................................ 3-29
Analyzer Configuration................................................................................................ 3-30

CHAPTER 4 USER INTERFACE........................................................................................... 4-1


Introduction to the Human-Machine Interface (HMI).............................................. 4-2
Working From the HMI............................................................................................ 4-3
Entering Passwords to Change Analyzer Parameter Settings...............................4-7
Changing the Modbus Node Address....................................................................4-8
Upgrading HMI-Display Unit Firmware.............................................................4-9
Summary of Analyzer Operation......................................................................... 4-11
Series 9900_HMI Menu Map................................................................................. 4-12
Working From the HOME Screen......................................................................... 4-13
Viewing Analyzer Data, Configuring Analyzer Settings, and Performing
Analyzer Functions........................................................................................................ 4-17
Configuring Analyzer/System Settings................................................................ 4-17
Viewing UV Bench Setup Parameters.................................................................4-18
Viewing and Changing Customer I/O Parameters..............................................4-19
Analog Output Setup����������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-20
Relay Output Setup�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-25
Analog Output Calibration�������������������������������������������������������������������������4-29
Contact Input Setup������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-30
Viewing and Changing Temperature Control Parameters...................................4-31
Viewing and Changing Optional Sensor Parameters..........................................4-33
Viewing and Changing Track-Hold Parameters..................................................4-34
Viewing and Changing UV Analytical Parameters............................................4-36
Viewing and Changing Sample Cell Parameters�����������������������������������������4-37
Viewing and Changing Analyzer Algorithm Selections������������������������������4-39
Viewing and Changing Analyzer Filter Coefficients�����������������������������������4-41
Viewing and Changing Analyzer Linear Coefficients���������������������������������4-42
Viewing and Changing Absorbance Offsets�������������������������������������������������4-43
Viewing and Changing Species Name & Unit��������������������������������������������4-44
Viewing and Changing Analysis Matrix�����������������������������������������������������4-45
Viewing and Changing UV Optical Bench Modbus Communications
Parameters...........................................................................................................4-46
Viewing and Changing HMI Date\Time.............................................................4-48
Saving and Restoring Configuration Data.........................................................4-49
Saving User Configuration Data�����������������������������������������������������������������4-50
Restoring User Configuration Data������������������������������������������������������������4-50

Contents | v
CHAPTER 5 CALIBRATION.................................................................................................. 5-1
Zero and Span Calibration.............................................................................................. 5-2
Manually Zero-Calibrate the Analyzer and Optional O2 Sensor, and
View the Results........................................................................................................ 5-3
Span-Calibrate the Analyzer and View the Results............................................. 5-6
Setting Up Auto-Zero Parameters and Viewing Live Results – Optional...... 5-10
Viewing the Auto Zero Offset (Drift) Results..................................................... 5-16
Calibrate the Analog Outputs............................................................................... 5-17

CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING............................................... 6-1


Safety Considerations...................................................................................................... 6-1
Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 6-2
Preventive Maintenance........................................................................................... 6-2
Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule.........................................................6-2
Before Performing Maintenance............................................................................. 6-4
Detecting a Plug in the Sample System................................................................6-4
Locating a Plug in the Sample System..................................................................6-5
Changing Out Replaceable Parts............................................................................ 6-6
Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance..............................................................6-6
Replacing the Source Lamps................................................................................6-16
When Do the Source Lamps Need to be Replaced?��������������������������������������6-16
About the Source Lamps������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-17
Source Lamps Replacement�������������������������������������������������������������������������6-18
Filter Wheel Maintenance – Motorized Optical Bench Analyzers......................6-24
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics................................................................................ 6-30
Diagnosing Problems With the Analyzer System.............................................. 6-31
Customer I/O Board Status Relay and Contact Indicators: Current States.......6-31
Types of Status Code Conditions.........................................................................6-32
Detecting Status Code Conditions......................................................................6-32
Viewing PMT Signals Diagnostic Information..................................................6-33
Viewing Lamp Operations Diagnostic Information............................................6-34
Viewing PMT\Motor Operations Diagnostic Information.................................6-35
Viewing Transmittance\Absorbance Diagnostic Information.............................6-36
Viewing UV Analysis Results Diagnostic Information......................................6-37
Viewing Sensor Signals Diagnostic Information................................................6-38
Viewing System Diagnostic Information............................................................6-40
Viewing Data Trending Diagnostic Information................................................6-42
Saving Trend Data From the HMI to a USB Flash Drive – One-Time Transfer�6-44
Continuous Logging of Trend Data to a USB Flash Drive��������������������������6-45
Graphing UV Analysis Results�������������������������������������������������������������������6-46
Graphing UV Optical Bench Signal Results�����������������������������������������������6-46
Graphing Sensor Signal Results������������������������������������������������������������������6-47
Working From a Trend Data Graph�������������������������������������������������������������6-48
Viewing Status Code Conditions on the HMI.................................................... 6-50
Analyzer Diagnostic Status Codes, Trigger Conditions, and Corrective Action...... 6-51
Status Code 1 Screens and Diagnostics�������������������������������������������������������6-52
Status Code 2 Screens and Diagnostics�������������������������������������������������������6-63
Status Code 3 Screens and Diagnostics�������������������������������������������������������6-71

vi | Model 9900RM Analyzer


CHAPTER 7 SERVICE AND PARTS..................................................................................... 7-1
Technical Support............................................................................................................. 7-1
AMETEK SERVICE and AFTERMARKET SALES SUPPORT................................... 7-2
Recommended Preventive Maintenance Spare Parts................................................ 7-3
Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance Spare Parts............... 7-4
Other Spare Parts............................................................................................................. 7-6
Replacement Cables, Analyzer Enclosure............................................................. 7-6
Spare Analyzer Fuses................................................................................................ 7-7
Optional Equipment, Spare Parts........................................................................... 7-8
Replacement Printed Circuit Boards...................................................................... 7-8
Miscellaneous Spare Parts........................................................................................ 7-9
Ordering a Hard Copy of the Analyzer User Manual......................................... 7-9

CHAPTER 8 GLOSSARY OF TERMS................................................................................... 8-1

APPENDIX A – OPTIONS........................................................................................................A-1
Paramagnetic O2 Sensor Concentration Measurement............................................ A-1

APPENDIX B – MODBUS® REGISTERS MAP.....................................................................B-1


Overview.......................................................................................................................... B-1
Changing Communication Settings...................................................................... B-2
Modbus Registers..................................................................................................... B-2
Modbus-TCP/Ethernet Support............................................................................. B-3
Analyzer Modbus Register Map................................................................................... B-4

APPENDIX C – DRAWINGS, BOARD LEDS (STATES), AND TEST POINTS...................C-1


Bench Controller Board (100-2380)............................................................................... C-2
Bench Controller Board LEDs: Descriptions and Current States..................... C-3
Bench Controller Board Test Points....................................................................... C-3
Customer I/O Board (100-2481)..................................................................................... C-4
Customer I/O Board Status Relay and Contact LEDs: Current States............. C-4
Customer Connections (100-2421-18).......................................................................... C-5
PMT Supply Board (100-2226)....................................................................................... C-6
PMT Signal Board (100-2227)........................................................................................ C-6
AC Power Distribution/MOV Board (100-2450).......................................................... C-7
Ground Board (100-2235)............................................................................................... C-7
Filter Wheel Motor Cable, Connector Detail (100-2273-9)........................................ C-8
Analyzer Rear Panel Layouts (GP, Div 2/Zone 2) (100-2421-1F)............................... C-8
HMI Connectivity, Rear/Bottom Views....................................................................... C-9
Lamp Maintenance Diagram, Motorized Filter (Multi-Species)
Optical Bench (100-2421-1B)........................................................................................ C-10
Lamp Maintenance Diagram, Motorless Filter (Single Species)
Optical Bench(100-2421-1H)........................................................................................ C-11
Optical Bench Heater, Overtemp Switch, and RTD Locations (100-2421-1G).... C-12

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION......................................................................................... S-1

Contents | vii
Safety Notes
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES contained in this manual emphasize critical instructions
as follows:

! An operating procedure which, if not strictly observed, may result in personal injury or envi-
ronmental contamination.
WARNING

! An operating procedure which, if not strictly observed, may result in damage to the equipment.
CAUTION

 Important information that should not be overlooked.


NOTE

Electrical Safety
High voltages are present in the analyzer housings. Always shut down power source(s) before
performing maintenance or troubleshooting. Only a qualified electrician should make electrical
connections and ground checks.

Any use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the safety
protection originally provided by the equipment.

Grounding
Instrument grounding is mandatory. Performance specifications and safety protection are void if
instrument is operated from an improperly grounded power source.

! Verify ground continuity of all equipment before applying power.


WARNING

viii | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Personnel and Equipment Safety Information
This section describes important safety information to avoid personal injury and damage to the
equipment while installing, operating, maintaining, or servicing the equipment. All safety regu-
lations, standards, and procedures at the analyzer location must be followed.

All personnel involved with the installation, start-up, operation, maintenance, service, or trou-
bleshooting of the analyzer must review and follow these Warnings and Cautions.

Warnings
Review and follow these Warnings to avoid personal injury or environmental contamination.

! All covers/doors must be tightly fastened with all screws and the Measuring Cell/Optical
Bench Assemblies must remain in place while the circuits are live.
WARNING

If installed in a hazardous classified area and it is necessary to remove/open the analyzer’s cov-
ers/doors while the circuits are live, first monitor the area for flammable gases and proceed only
when the area is safe.

! When the Analyzer Enclosure’s cover is off, take appropriate precautions to avoid electrical
shock. Hazardous voltages are present inside.
WARNING

! Always disconnect main AC power and/or alternate power sources (if used, i.e., for relay con-
tacts) to the analyzer before opening any covers/doors on the analyzer and before removing any
WARNING
components from the analyzer.

! All electrical connections, adjustments, or servicing of the analyzer should be performed only
by properly trained and qualified personnel.
WARNING

All electrical connections, materials, and methods (plus all safety policies and procedures) must
be made in compliance with local wiring regulations and electrical codes for the hazardous
area, as specified by the Owner Company, local electrical-inspection authority, and National/
EU regulations.

! Because ultraviolet radiation can harm your eyes, never view the light emanating through the
end window of the source lamp. If the source lamp must be viewed while energized, wear safety
WARNING
glasses that block the ultraviolet radiation.

Contents | ix
Cautions
Review and follow these Cautions to avoid damaging the equipment.

! If it becomes necessary to handle any of the electronic circuit boards, do not subject the boards
to static discharge. The ideal solution is a static-safe work area. Since such areas typically are
CAUTION
not available at field installation sites, the use of a wrist strap connected directly to a ground
is recommended. If a wrist strap is not available, you should at the very least touch the metal
chassis (to ground yourself) before handling or touching the boards.

! The electronic circuit boards and other static-sensitive components should be stored and trans-
ported in static-shielding carriers or packages.
CAUTION

! For electric-shock protection, the analyzer must be operated from a grounded power source that
has a securely connected protective-ground contact.
CAUTION

! When handling the source lamp, it is very important not to touch the window of the lamp be-
cause residual oils from the fingers will absorb ultraviolet light. The window is the flat surface
CAUTION
at the end of the narrow glass tube. The lamp assembly is fragile and should be handled with
care.

x | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Warning Labels
These symbols may appear on the instrument in order to alert you of existing conditions.
Protective Conductor Terminal
(BORNIER DE L’ECRAN DE PROTECTION)
Schutzerde
Caution – Risk of electric shock
(ATTENTION – RISQUE DE DÉCHARGE ÉLECTRIQUE)
Achtung – Hochspannung Lebensgefahr
Caution – Refer to accompanying documents
(ATTENTION – SE RÉFERER AUX DOCUMENTS JOINTS)
Achtung – Beachten Sie beiliegende Dokumente
CAUTION – Hot Surface
(ATTENTION – SURFACE CHAUDE)
Achtung – Heiße Oberfläche

Environmental Information
This AMETEK product contains materials that can be reclaimed and recycled. In some cases the
product may contain materials known to be hazardous to the environment or human health.
In order to prevent the release of harmful substances into the environment and to conserve
our natural resources, AMETEK recommends that you arrange to recycle this product when it
reaches its “end of life.”
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) should never be disposed of in a munici-
pal waste system (residential trash). The Wheelie Bin marking on this product is a reminder to
dispose of the product properly after it has completed its useful life and been removed from
service. Metals, plastics, and other components are recyclable and you can do your part by doing
one of the following steps:
• When the equipment is ready to be disposed of, take it to your local or region-
al waste collection administration for recycling.
• In some cases, your “end of life” product may be traded in for credit towards
the purchase of new AMETEK instruments. Contact your dealer to see if this
program is available in your area.
• If you need further assistance in recycling your AMETEK product, contact our
office listed in this manual.

UV Source Lamps Disposal


AMETEK recommends that all UV lamps – whether they are new, used, or damaged in any way
– need to be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
Most UV lamps do not contain restricted substances listed under the European 2 directive.
However, special handling requirements are required for some lamps if they are broken. Two
examples include Cadmium and Beryllium lamps. Refer to a current Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for handling any lamp where the glass envelope has been broken and which has ex-
posed the metal cathode in the centre of the lamp.

Contents | xi
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designated to provide reasonable protec-
NOTE
tion against harmful interference when equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-
tions. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at own expense.

! Read and follow the recommendations in this section to avoid performance variations or dam-
age to the internal circuits of this equipment when installed in harsh electrical environments.
CAUTION

The various configurations of the Model 9900 Analyzer should not produce, or fall victim to, electromag-
netic disturbances as specified in the European Union’s EMC Directive. Strict compliance to the EMC Di-
rective requires that certain installation techniques and wiring practices are used to prevent or minimize
erratic behavior of the Analyzer or its electronic neighbors. Below are examples of the techniques and
wiring practices to be followed.
In meeting the EMC requirements, the various Analyzer configurations described in this manual rely heavily
on the use of metallic shielded cables used to connect to the customer’s equipment and power. Foil and braid
shielded I/O and DC power cables are recommended for use in otherwise unprotected situations. In addition,
hard conduit, flexible conduit, and armor around non-shielded wiring also provides excellent control of radio
frequency disturbances. However, use of these shielding techniques is effective only when the shielding ele-
ment is connected to the equipment chassis/earth ground at both ends of the cable run. This may cause ground
loop problems in some cases. These should be treated on a case-by-case basis. Disconnecting one shield ground
may not provide sufficient protection depending on the electronic environment. Connecting one shield
ground via a 0.1 microfarad ceramic capacitor is a technique allowing high frequency shield bonding while
avoiding the AC-ground metal connection. In the case of shielded cables the drain wire or braid connection
must be kept short. A two-inch connection distance between the shield’s end and the nearest grounded chassis
point, ground bar or terminal is highly recommended. An even greater degree of shield performance can be
achieved by using metallic glands for shielded cable entry into metal Electronics Enclosures. Expose enough of
the braid/foil/drain where it passes through the gland so that the shield materials can be wrapped backwards
onto the cable jacket and captured inside the gland, and tightened up against the metal interior.
Inductive loads connected to the low voltage “Alarm Contacts” are not recommended. However, if this
becomes a necessity, follow proper techniques and wiring practices. Install an appropriate transient volt-
age suppression device (low voltage MOV, “Transzorb,” or R/C) as close as possible to the inductive device
to reduce the generation of transients. Do not run this type of signal wiring along with other I/O or DC in
the same-shielded cable. Inductive load wiring must be separated from other circuits in conduit by using
an additional cable shield on the offending cable.
In general, for optimum protection against high frequency transients and other disturbances, do not allow
installation of this Analyzer where its unshielded I/O and DC circuits are physically mixed with AC mains
or any other circuit that could induce transients into the Analyzer or the overall system. Examples of elec-
trical events and devices known for the generation of harmful electromagnetic disturbances include mo-
tors, capacitor bank switching, storm related transients, RF welding equipment, static, and walkie-talkies.

xii | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Special Warnings and Information

Equipment Used in Haza­­rdous Locations


Refer to Chapter 2 – Specifications for details about the suitability of this equipment in hazard-
ous locations. This analyzer must not be commissioned until a person trained in the area of
evaluating equipment for use in hazardous classified locations has confirmed that this equip-
ment and its installation are in compliance with the requirements for the area.

! Explosion Hazard – Substitution of Components May Impair Suitability for Class I, Division 2.
WARNING

! Explosion Hazard – Do Not Disconnect Equipment Unless Power Has Been Switched Off or
the Area is Known to be Non-Hazardous.
WARNING

All input and output wiring must be in accordance with wiring methods authorized for the area
classification by the authority having jurisdiction. The need for sealing glands must be considered
for connections made directly to the enclosure when the area is pressurized or when the sample
is toxic or flammable in order to avoid the possibility of transporting gas to another area by way
of these wireways. Although the probability of leaks of the sample system is very low, a fitting left
un-tightened during maintenance could allow hazardous sample gas to flow into the analyzer
enclosure and the wiring area. Tests have indicated that with the sample system completely discon-
nected at the rear panel, all covers/doors installed/closed and on a table at atmospheric pressure,
with an inlet pressure of 13 psi applied to both inlet and vent ports, the pressure in the enclosure
will rise to 0.5 mBar (0.2” WC). This is very low pressure and normally would not pose any hazard,
but the installer must consider that if the analyzer is installed in a sealed (Type 4 or IP65) enclosure,
pressure at the wireway ends could build up to a level as high as the sample system inlet.

Contents | xiii
EU Declaration of Conformity

EU Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer’s Name: AMETEK Canada LP
A Division of AMETEK Process & Analytical Instruments
(ISO 9001:2008 Registered)

Manufacturer’s Address: 2876 Sunridge Way N.E.


Calgary, Alberta, Canada T1Y 7H9
Phone: (403) 235-8400 / Fax: (403) 248-3550

EU Representative Address: AMETEK Precision Instruments Europe GmbH


Rudolf-Diesel-Str. 16
D-40670 Meerbusch, Germany
Phone 49-2159 91 36 0 / Fax: 49-2159 91 36 80

Declare under our sole responsibility that the product:


Product Name: Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Photometric Analyzer
Marking: II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc

Conforms to the following EU Standards and Directives:

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU using the following standards:


IEC/EN 61326-1 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use – EMC requirements –
Part 1: General requirements.
IEC/EN 55011 (CISPR 55011) Radiated Electromagnetic Emissions, Class A 30 MHz to 1 GHz.
IEC/EN 55011 (CISPR 55011) Conducted Electromagnetic Emissions, Class A.
IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase).
IEC/EN 61000-3-3 Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply
systems, for equipment with rated current ≤16 A per phase and not subject to conditional
connection.
IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Testing and measurement techniques – Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field
immunity test.
IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test.
IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Testing and measurement techniques – Surge immunity test.
IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Testing and measurement techniques – Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-
frequency fields.
IEC/EN 61000-4-8 Testing and measurement techniques – Power frequency magnetic field immunity test.
IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
immunity tests.

Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS 2).

Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU using the following standards:


IEC/EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and
laboratory use – Part 1: General requirements.

Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU:


Article 4, Paragraph 3

Canada LP
A DIVISION OF AMETEK PROCESS & ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS
Western Research

PN 903-8781, Rev D Page 1 of 2

xiv | Model 9900RM Analyzer


EU Declaration of Conformity

The object of the declaration described [herein] is in conformity with the relevant Union harmonization
legislation (Directive 2014/34/EU):
EN 60079-0:2012 + A11 General requirements
EN 60079-15:2010 Equipment Protection by type of protection ‘n’
Certificate Number: DEKRA 15ATEX0118 X
Notified Body: DEKRA Certification B.V. 0344
Meander 1051, 6825 MJ Arnhem
The Netherlands

____________________________

Randy Meads
Quality Assurance Manager
Calgary, Alberta, Canada
June 28, 2017

Canada LP
A DIVISION OF AMETEK PROCESS & ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS
Western Research

Page 2 of 2

Contents | xv
Warranty and Claims
We warrant that any equipment of our own manufacture or manufactured for us pursuant to our specifications
which shall not be, at the time of shipment thereof by or for us, free from defects in material or workmanship un-
der normal use and service will be repaired or replaced (at our option) by us free of charge, provided that written
notice of such defect is received by us within twelve (12) months from date of shipment of portable analyzers or
within eighteen (18) months from date of shipment or twelve (12) months from date of installation of permanent
equipment, whichever period is shorter. All equipment requiring repair or replacement under the warranty shall be
returned to us at our factory, or at such other location as we may designate, transportation prepaid. Such returned
equipment shall be examined by us and if it is found to be defective as a result of defective materials or workman-
ship, it shall be repaired or replaced as aforesaid. Our obligation does not include the cost of furnishing any labor
in connection with the installation of such repaired or replaced equipment or parts thereof, nor does it include the
responsibility or cost of transportation. In addition, instead of repairing or replacing the equipment returned to us
as aforesaid, we may, at our option, take back the defective equipment, and refund in full settlement the purchase
price thereof paid by Buyer.
Process photometric analyzers, process moisture analyzers, and sample systems are warranted to perform the in-
tended measurement, only in the event that the customer has supplied, and AMETEK has accepted, valid sample
stream composition data, process conditions, and electrical area classification prior to order acknowledgment. The
photometric light sources are warranted for ninety (90) days from date of shipment. Resale items warranty is limited
to the transferable portion of the original equipment manufacturer’s warranty to AMETEK. If you are returning
equipment from outside Canada, a statement should appear on the documentation accompanying the equipment
being returned declaring that the goods being returned for repair are Canadian goods, the name of the firm who
purchased the goods, and the shipment date.
The warranty shall not apply to any equipment (or part thereof) which has been tampered with or altered after
leaving our control or which has been replaced by anyone except us, or which has been subject to misuse, neglect,
abuse or improper use. Misuse or abuse of the equipment, or any part thereof, shall be construed to include, but
shall not be limited to, damage by negligence, accident, fire or force of the elements. Improper use or misapplications
shall be construed to include improper or inadequate protection against shock, vibration, high or low temperature,
overpressure, excess voltage and the like, or operating the equipment with or in a corrosive, explosive or combustible
medium, unless the equipment is specifically designed for such service, or exposure to any other service or environ-
ment of greater severity than that for which the equipment was designed.
The warranty does not apply to used or secondhand equipment nor extend to anyone other than the original
purchaser from us. Should the Buyer’s technical staff require the on-site assistance of AMETEK’s agents or employ-
ees for service calls covered by this warranty clause, the Buyer shall pay travel time plus actual travel and living
expenses.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION AND WARRANTIES OF FITNESS OR OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY OTHER THAN AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN, AND OF ALL OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LI-
ABILITIES ON OUR PART. IN NO EVENT SHALL WE BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER
PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT FOR ANY ANTICIPATED OR LOST PROFITS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, TIME CHANGES OR ANY OTHER LOSSES INCURRED BY THE ORIGINAL
PURCHASER OR ANY THIRD PARTY IN CONNECTION WITH THE PURCHASE, INSTALLATION, REPAIR OR
OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT, OR ANY PART THEREOF COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.
WE MAKE NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES
OF FITNESS OR OF MERCHANTABILITY, AS TO ANY OTHER MANUFACTURER’S EQUIPMENT, WHETHER
SOLD SEPARATELY OR IN CONJUNCTION WITH EQUIPMENT OF OUR MANUFACTURE. WE DO NOT
AUTHORIZE ANY REPRESENTATIVE OR OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR US ANY LIABILITY IN CON-
NECTION WITH EQUIPMENT, OR ANY PART THEREOF, COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY.

xvi | Model 9900RM Analyzer


OVERVIEW

This chapter discusses the features and summarizes the operation of the
Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer. It also provides an overview of the
sample system, electronics, and other analyzer sub-systems.

Theory of Operation
The Model 9900RM Analyzer measures the absorbance of ultraviolet radia-
tion (light) by a gas or liquid species. In the standard motorless filter (single-
species) configuration the analyzer measures at two discrete wavelengths,
while in the optional motorized filter wheel (multi-species or multi-range)
configuration it uses a maximum of six discrete wavelengths. In gases, the
concentrations of the species absorbing the light are determined through
application of the ideal gas law in concert with the laws of Bouguer, Beer,
and Lambert law, extended by using a system of linear equations. The
measurements can be viewed from the Human-Machine Interface (HMI),
on a computer via a serial or Ethernet connection, or can be tied to ana-
log output channels for viewing on a remote Distributed Control System
(DCS), Data Acquisition System (DAS), or Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC).

The Beer-Lambert law, in combination with the ideal gas situation, states
that:

At a given wavelength the volumetric concentration of an


absorbing gas is directly proportional to the logarithm of
the transmittance and the temperature, and inversely pro-
portional to the Measuring Cell length and pressure.

The proportionality constant is determined according to the units chosen


for length, temperature, and pressure.

Overview | 1-1
The Implementation
The analyzer is comprised of two ultraviolet light sources, a Filterblock
that houses two (motorless filter, or “single-species”, version) to six (mo-
torized filter wheel – multi-species or multi-range version) wavelength
selective filters, a Beamsplitter, front surfaced mirrors, a Measuring Cell,
and two matched Photodetectors (Figure 1-1).

Figure 1-1.
Analyzer schematic.

1-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Bench Controller Board
The principle operation of the Model 9900 Analyzer is controlled by the
Bench Controller board.

The Bench Controller board is responsible for interfacing to all of the


electro-mechanical and electro-optical components of the analyzer’s
Optical Bench for the purpose of timing, control, detector data acquisition
and pre-processing, and signal monitoring and optimization. The Bench
Controller board firmware uses the real-time operating system
FreeRTOS.org to manage the Bench control, data acquisition, signal pro-
cessing and customer I/O tasks.

The Bench Controller board also handles customer inputs and outputs,
which includes the optional touchscreen color Human-Machine Interface
(HMI), processing of detector data to generate customer outputs, conver-
sion of auxiliary data input signals, and communication with the DCS,
DAS, or PLC. See Figure 1-1.

Customer I/O Board


The Customer I/O board is a customer interface board that provides four
isolated analog outputs, two contact inputs, and one status relay output.
An alternative connection point is to an isolated RS-485 communication
port on the Bench Controller board.

The voltage outputs are selectable to either 0–5 V or 1–5 V. Each of the
contact inputs can be configured to initiate an action (e.g., Zero-Calibra-
tion or Span-Calibration) or to indicate a sample system state (e.g., on
sample stream or on calibration gas). The status relay can be set up to be
triggered on a combination of analyzer detectable Fault or Warning condi-
tion, calibration in progress state, or bench setup in progress.

Overview | 1-3
Optical Bench
Model 9900 Analyzer (Multi-Species/Motorized Filter Wheel Version)
In this configuration up to six filters are used in a rotating filter wheel
(Figure 1-1). To achieve measurements at discrete wavelengths, the lo-
cations of the filters in the filter wheel and the placement of the source
lamps are chosen so that, at any given time, the Photodetectors are ex-
posed to light from only one lamp and filter combination (i.e., a discrete
wavelength). With two source lamps and six filters, twelve discrete wave-
lengths can, theoretically, be produced. In practice, up to six are used.

One revolution of the filter wheel is used to collect a complete set of


detector data from the available wavelengths. During the revolution, the
source lamps are pulsed alternately.

Model 9900 Analyzer (Single-Species/Motorless Filter Version)


In this configuration two filters are used, each one mounted in front of
one lamp (Figure 1-1). The light sources are modulated, such that only
one lamp is being pulsed at a time. The signals from the Photodetectors
are demodulated such that light from only one lamp and filter combina-
tion is considered at a time in the data analysis (i.e., a discrete wavelength
is used to measure the chemical species of interest).

Model 9900 Analyzer (Single- and Multi-Species Versions)


As each pulse of light arrives, the Beamsplitter directs half the light to the
Reference Photodetector and half through the sample gas to the Measure
Photodetector. Because of the longer optical path length, light losses at
the mirrors, and light losses through the Measuring Cell windows, the
amount of light received by the Measure Photodetector is less than that
received by the Reference Photodetector, even when there are no absorbers
in the sample gas.

Although the analyzer uses individually controlled power supplies for


each PMT to counter such effect, under certain circumstances (e.g., long
path length Measuring Cell, strong wavelength, etc.), the imbalance can
become so great that it may be necessary to place a screen in the Refer-
ence path to block a portion of the light. At each wavelength for any given
analyzer, these optical-path factors produce a constant difference between
the amounts of light received by the two Photodetectors.

When absorbers are present in the sample gas, the amount of light re-
ceived by the Measure Photodetector is reduced further. The magnitude
of the reduction is dependent upon the concentrations and absorbance
constants of the absorbers. Thus, for each wavelength, the difference in
the amounts of light received by the two Photodetectors (corrected for the
optical-path factors) is used to determine the absorbance of the sample
gas. Then, the concentrations of the individual absorbers of interest are
calculated.

1-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Sample System
The sample system components are configurable for both gas and liq-
uid applications. A typical configuration for the sample system consists
of Sample Inlet and Outlet (Vent) connection points on the analyzer, a
Sample and a Vent line (supplied by AMETEK or by customer), the Mea-
suring (Sample) Cell, and an optional flow indicator (or meter/sensor). See
Figure 1-2.

Zero gas and Span gas also come in through the Sample Inlet, switched
from sample gas by manual or automated valves. The sample system can
also contain pressure sensors/indicators, additional sensors (O2, Cell Pres-
sure, Flow Rate), a particulate filter, sample dryer, and other application-
dependent components. Information about optional components that
make up the analyzer or its sample system are included in Appendix A
– Options, or in the Supplemental Information section of this manual, in the
form of Manual Supplements.

Sample Flow

The sample gas is drawn from the sample stream through a Sample
Probe (by AMETEK or by customer) and through the Sample Line to the
Measuring Cell where it is analyzed and returned through the Vent Line
to the dispersal location, either the sample stream, a low pressure flare
header, or a vent pipe to atmosphere.

 Figure 1-2 depicts a basic analyzer plumbing configuration with op-


tional equipment, and may not be exactly as shown for your system.
NOTE

CUSTOMER ANALYZER

Figure 1-2.
Analyzer plumbing
diagram.

Overview | 1-5
Analyzer Electronics and Sample System Features
The Model 9900 Analyzer has been designed to comply with electrical
classification requirements for General Purpose and Division 2/Zone 2
areas specific to this analyzer’s intended application. Depending on the
application, some of these features may not be available for your analyzer.

Multi-Component Analysis (Motorized Filter Wheel version only)


The availability of six discrete wavelengths enables multi-component
analysis or single-component analysis with the capability of eliminat-
ing interferences from other absorbers. As an example, the analyzer
can be configured for measurement of all, or a combination of:
SO2/NOx, SO2/H2S, SO2/total reduced sulfur (TRS), and NOx in a dry
sample gas. It can also be configured for liquid applications.

Analog Output signal channels


Four isolated analog output channels. The channels are configurable
individually as voltage output (0–5 VDC or 1–5 VDC) or current output
(0–20 mADC or 4–20 mADC). When configured as 1–5 VDC or 4–20 mADC
output, an option is available to clamp the output from going below
1 VDC or 4 mADC. Each channel can be assigned a signal from a list of
measured parameters. Each channel can be calibrated individually.

Status Relay
One dry contact (normally open) status relays. The relay is configu-
rable to indicate any of the following: a Fault or Warning condition,
calibration in progress state, or bench setup in progress..

Contact Inputs
Up to two contact inputs. The inputs are configurable to trigger one of
these actions: Zero-Calibration, Span-Calibration, Bench Auto-Setup,
Track-Hold, or an on- or­­off-process stream.

Data Upload/Download to/from USB Flash Drive


A USB port on the HMI allows the transfer of logged data to a USB
Flash Drive for viewing on a computer. The USB Flash Drive is also
used to upgrade the HMI software.

Human-Machine Interface (HMI) – Optional


A menu-driven interface provides access to analyzer information,
setup, diagnostics, and calibration screens, plus a display of system
signals and parameters.

1-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Communications
ModbusRTU-over-RS485:
One RS-485 serial communication port is dedicated to customer data
acquisition. This port uses Modicon Modbus® RTU protocol. The Mod-
bus® RTU protocol can be used with the analyzer operating as a slave
device, responding to Modbus queries within one second.

ModbusTCP-over-Ethernet:
One RJ-45 Ethernet port is for 10/100 Base-T (IEEE802.3) network con-
nection, using TCP/IP protocol, which allows for remote communica-
tion between the analyzer and the customer DCS, DAS, or PLC. It
supports Modbus TCP protocol.

Advanced Diagnostics
Preventive maintenance and diagnostics are made easy with improved:
• Lamp setup and optimization.
• Lamp, optical system, and I/O diagnostics available via the HMI.
• LEDs on the circuit boards to indicate the status of key system func-
tions such as relay status and heater duty cycles. Information about
the LEDs on the Bench Controller board and Customer I/O board,
and their operation descriptions and current states, are included
with each board’s layout drawing in Appendix C.
• Test points on boards to facilitate functional operation checks.
Information about Bench Controller board test points, their pa-
rameters, and their values are included with the Bench Controller
board’s layout drawing in Appendix C.

Gas and Liquid applications


Sample systems designed to accommodate gas and liquid applications.

Optional Sensors
Support for external sensors for measuring­O2 and sample flow.

Graphing and Saving Trend Data


Pre-defined groups of parameters are logged continuously on the
HMI and the data for parameter groups can be graphed on the display
and saved to a USB Flash Drive. The HMI stores data for the last 12
hours (at 1-minute intervals).

Overview | 1-7
Working in This Manual
While working in this manual, icons in the margins represent various
kinds of information that serve as reminders or extra information about
the topic.

 Example:
 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Navigation icon:
Indicates the menu structure to follow to view a menu, sub-menu, or analyzer
information while working from the HMI. In the example at left, the Diagnostic
DIAGUV Bench Status
menu is first displayed, followed by the UV Bench Status diagnostic screen. From
Status Code1< > this screen, press the button to view the Status Code <1, 2, or 3> screen.
Pressing the button will display the second of two Status Code screens.

 Example:
Refer to “Replacing the
 Reminder icon:
These reminders indicate related information about the topic, or certain actions
Source Lamps” in Chapter 6 that are necessary before continuing with the current procedure. See example at
for information about replacing left.
the lamps.

Descriptions of menus, terms, characters, parameters, and commands can


be found in Chapter 4 – User Interface. Additional terms and abbrevia-
tions encountered while working from the HMI and in this manual can be
found in Chapter 8 – Glossary of Terms.

1-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Supplemental Information – Where Can I Find It?
Some analyzers may be configured with non-standard or optional com-
ponents, which requires additional documentation. Other information
pertinent to the analyzer, while not part of this manual, is shipped with
all analyzers. Along with the analyzer User Manual, this information – also
known as the Documentation Package – is included in the “Supplemental
Information” folder of the Model 9900 Analyzer Documentation Package CD
shipped with the analyzer.

 If a hard copy of the analyzer User Manual is ordered, this information


is located in the “Supplemental Information” section of this manual.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 7 for User Manual ordering information.

This CD consists of the following:


• The “User Manual” folder contains the main analyzer manual.
• The “Supplemental Information” folder can consist of self-contained
documents called Manual Supplements that describe and illustrate instal-
lation, operation, and maintenance procedures for optional equipment
that make up your sample system.
These Manual Supplements are typically used for Measuring Cells*, non-
standard or optional equipment*, or information that is intended to
replace similar information in the analyzer manual.
(*These documents can also contain non-standard Spare Parts List, or
the spare parts can be part of a Custom Spare Parts list.)
This folder can also contain:
- 9900_Programming Parameters which lists factory-default configura-
tion settings of all programmable parameters for the analyzer.
- 9900_CFG Report which lists additional factory-default configuration
settings of all programmable parameters for the analyzer.
- 9900_Signed Final QC (Quality Control) document which consists of
AMETEK Testing Quality Control information for the analyzer, plus
additional analyzer information.
- S9900_HMI Menu Map, which lists and illustrates the entire menu
structure of the Model 9900 Analyzer HMI.
- Documents for optional components such as the O2 Sensor.
- Other customer-specific information may also be included (if ap-
plicable), such as Product Data Sheets, a Custom Spare Parts list, or
analyzer Certificates.

Overview | 1-9
This page intentionally left blank.

1-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


SPECIFICATIONS

The Standard Range is defined as the full-scale range that falls within the
minimum and maximum allowable for a given Measuring Cell. The speci-
fications apply only to these ranges, are typical, and in some cases are
application-specific. Calculations of minimum and maximum are based on
760 mmHg atmospheric pressure.

 IMPORTANT
The specifications listed in this chapter apply to both the Single-Spe-
NOTE
cies (Motorless Filter) and Multiple-Species (Motorized Filter Wheel)
versions of the Model 9900 Analyzer, except where noted.

In all specifications, NOx applies to Multiple-Species (Motorized


Filter Wheel) Analyzers only.

For applications measuring other species not mentioned in this man-


ual, refer to the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer
for a Manual Supplement that lists other specifications.

For applications using the optional O2 Sensor, O2 Sensor specifica-


tions are included in this chapter. For more information about the
O2 Sensor, refer to the Hummingbird (Servomex) Pm1158 Oxygen
Transducer “Instruction Manual” in the analyzer Documentation
Package.

Specifications | 2-1
Methodology
Multiple wavelength, high resolution, non-dispersive ultraviolet.

Optional O2 Sensor:
Hummingbird (Servomex) Paramagnetic Pm1158 (CSA-approved for inte-
grating into the G.P Div 2/Zone 2 Analyzers package only).

Standard Ranges
The Standard or Customer Range is defined as the full-scale ranges that
fall within the minimum and maximum allowable for a given Measuring
Cell. The specifications apply only to these ranges, which are typical and
in some cases application-specific. Calculations of minimum and maxi-
mum are based on 760 mmHg atmospheric pressure.

Low Limit Low Limit


Min Full-scale Max Full-scale (Single-Spe- (Multi-Species/
Species Range Range cies Bench) Range Bench)
SO2 @ 213 400 ppm/CL 4 %/CL 10 ppm 10 ppm
SO2 @ 285 2000 ppm/CL 20 %/CL 25 ppm 50 ppm
SO2 @ 309 8000 ppm/CL 80 %/CL 100 ppm 200 ppm
H2S @ 228 4000 ppm/CL 20 %/CL 50 ppm 100 ppm
H2S @ 214 1000 ppm/CL 5 %/CL 25 ppm 50 ppm
NO 2000 ppm/CL 10 %/CL 50 ppm 100 ppm*
NO2 4000 ppm/CL 20 %/CL 100 ppm 100 ppm*
NOx 2000 ppm/CL 10 %/CL N/A 100 ppm*
O2 0–25 %

 CL = Cell Length (cm).


NOTE
* The listed ranges (100 ppm) for NO, NO2, NOx require pre-tested
lamp pairs. The normal low limit ranges for each species are 200 ppm.

2-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Analyzer Specifications

Number of UV Species
Single-Species Analyzer or Multi-Range (Motorless Filter): 1

Multi-Species Analyzer (Motorized Filter Wheel): 1–5

Response Time
Response time excludes the external sample system.

90 % in 30 seconds or less

Accuracy
Accuracy is determined by comparing analyzer response to a known stan-
dard gas after a calibration has been performed.

SO2, H2S, NO, NO2, NOx: Better than 1.0 % full-scale of standard ranges.
O2: ± 0.1 % O2

Repeatability
SO2, H2S, NO, NO2, NOx: ± 0.5 % full-scale of standard ranges.
O2: ± 0.02 % O2

Linearity
Per ANSI/ISA 51.1–1979 (R1993):
SO2: < ± 1.0 % full-scale of reading
H2S, NO, NO2, NOx: < ± 1.5 % full-scale of reading
O2: ± 0.1 % O2

Stability
Noise (applicable to SO2, H2S, NO, NO2, NOx measurement) at constant
ambient temperature:

Single-Species (Motorless Filter) Analyzer


Better than 0.5 % full-scale of standard ranges

Multi-Species (Motorized Filter Wheel) Analyzer


Better than 0.2 % full-scale of standard ranges

Specifications | 2-3
Cross-Talk
Multi-Species (Motorized Filter Wheel) Analyzer Only
± 1.0 % NO2 full-scale on to SO2.
± 1.0 % SO2 full-scale on to NOx.

Temperature Drift
Specification based on using a temperature-controlled Optical Bench.

SO2 @ 285: 12 ppm / Cell length (cm) / °C


H2S @ 228: 20 ppm / Cell length (cm) / °C
H2S @ 214: 5 ppm / Cell length (cm) / °C
NO, NO2: 30 ppm / Cell length (cm) / °C
NOx: 20 ppm / Cell length (cm) / °C

 Use above specifications OR (Customer full-scale / Maximum full-


NOTE
scale / °C), whichever is greater.

O2: Within a range of 0–65 °C:


Zero: ± 0.03 % O2 / °C
Span: ± 0.05 % O2 / °C

24-Hour Zero Drift


SO2, H2S, NO, NO2, NOx: 2.0 % full-scale of standard ranges OR
the equivalent of 10 °C Temperature Drift,
whichever is less (with Auto-Zero disabled).
O2: 0.1 % O2.

Pressure and Temperature Compensation (Optional)


Sample Pressure: With optional Cell Pressure Transducer
installed.
0–1551.45 mmHg (0–30 psia)
0–5171.49 mmHg (0–100 psia)

Sample Temperature: 0–127 °C (32–261 °F) with optional Cell Tem-


perature PNP installed.
0–200 °C (32–392 °F) with optional Cell Tem-
perature RTD installed.

2-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Communication
• Two (standard) RS-485 Serial ports, isolated, 4-wire or 2-wire multi-
drop, supports Modbus® RTU protocol. One RS-485 port is reserved
for the Pro-face HMI unit (TFT colour LCD touchscreen display); one
RS-485 port is available to a customer Modbus® RTU master).

• One (standard) RS-232 Serial port, isolated (used for Optical Bench
firmware upgrade).

• Ethernet (IEEE 802.3u), 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, RJ-45, Modbus TCP


protocol.
- The Ethernet port from the Pro-face HMI unit allows a customer
Modbus TCP master to access all read-only and a limited number of
write registers.
- With the installation of an optional Modbus Gateway, a customer
Modbus TCP master can access all available registers.

Customer Outputs
• Four Analog Outputs, isolated and configurable individually as
0–20 mADC, 4–20 mADC, 0–5 VDC, or 1–5 VDC.

• Five Relay Contacts, Form A (SPST), Normally Open.


Switching: maximum 240 VDC, 0.5 ADC, limited to 10 W
Carry: maximum 1.2 ADC

 Analog and alarm relay contact outputs are available on the Cus-
tomer I/O board.
NOTE

Customer Inputs
Two dry contact inputs, isolated as a group:
Voltage: 5 VDC, unregulated
Current: 0.5 mADC approximately

 Available on the Customer I/O board.


NOTE

Specifications | 2-5
Electrical Requirements

Supply Voltage

120 VAC ±10 %, 50/60 Hz


or
240 VAC ±10 %, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

Typically < 200 W maximum start-up (from a cold start) with average
power depending on ambient temperature.

300 W maximum.

Measuring Cell Construction


Standard: 316 stainless steel body with quartz
windows.

Sample Gas Requirements


O2 Flow Sensor: Non-corrosive, non-condensing, free from
oil and free from particulates less than three
microns (0–95 %, non-condensing).

Sample System Pressure Limits


40 psig maximum if no optional sensor installed; requires 0–100 psia pres-
sure sensor.

- 5 psig maximum if optional O2 Sensor installed.

- 15 psig maximum if optional 0–30 psia Pressure Transducer installed.

- 29 psig maximum if optional Natural Gas Flow Meter installed.

 Up to 275.8 kPag (40 psig / 2.758 barg) can be accommodated, de-


pending on the application. Consult with AMETEK to determine the
NOTE
safe operating pressure.

2-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Flow Measurement (Optional)
Two types:

Natural Gas background


0.0–5.0 L/minute (0.0–10.6 SCFH) ±10 %Accuracy

Air background
0.0–10.0 L/minute (0.0–21.2 SCFH) ±10 %Accuracy

Sample Gas Flow Rate


0.25–5.0 L/minute (0.6–10.5 SCFH).

Zero Fluid
 Others fluids may be used, depending on the application.
NOTE

Gas Applications
UHP N2 or Instrument Air for non-flammable streams.
Instrument Air Quality:
As per ANSI/ISA S7.0.01 (1996) Quality Standard for Instrument Air.
Liquid Applications
Distilled water of at least pharmaceutical grade.

Storage Conditions
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F), limited by Pro-face HMI unit.

Operating Conditions

Ambient Operating Temperature

-20 °C to +50 °C (-4 °F to +122 °F)


0 °C to +50 °C (32 °F to +122 °F) (only for analyzer with HMI Display or
O2 Sensor)

Humidity

10–95 % RH, limited by Pro-face HMI unit.

Specifications | 2-7
Maximum Altitude

2000 m

Ingress Protection

The enclosure provides ingress protection IP20 per IEC 60950. The cus-
tomer is required to provide additional ingress protection to IP54 when
installing in Division 2 or Zone 2 classified hazardous areas.

Physical Dimensions
Height Enclosure only: 173.99 mm (6.9")
Front Panel: 177.00 mm (7.0")
Width Enclosure only: 447.48 mm (17.6")
Front Panel: 482.00 mm (19.0")
Depth Enclosure only: 559.56 mm (22.0")
Enclosure with Handles: 602.56 mm (23.7")
Weight 18.2 kg (40 lb) maximum, with all options. (Weight
may vary slightly, depending on options included.)

Electrical Classifications
The Model 9900RM Analyzer is certified with regard to electrical safety for
Pollution Degree 2 (normally nonconductive environmental pollution
occurs with occasional condensation) and Installation Category II (local
level transients, less than those found at power distribution level). Mains
supply voltage fluctuations are not to exceed 10 % of the nominal supply
voltage.
Other approvals and certifications for the standard General Purpose ana-
lyzer include:
CEC/NEC: Class I Division 2 Group ABCD, T4
Ex nA IIC T4
Class I Zone 2 AEx nA IIC T4
IECEx: Certificate No.: IECEx CSA 15.0011X
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
ATEX: Certificate No.: DEKRA 15ATEX0118 X
II 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
EMC: IEC/EN 61326
FCC (47 CFR 15)
Industry Canada (ICES-0003)
Additional: CE Marking: LVD – 2014/35/EU
RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive:
2011/65/EU (RoHS 2)

2-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Analyzer Certificates and Marking
AMETEK’s certificates for the Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer and its
marking are included in the following pages.

CSA Certificate, Hazardous Locations

Certificate of Compliance
Certificate: 2568583 Master Contract: 164369

Project: 2568583 Date Issued: July 25, 2013


Issued to: Ametek Canada Inc
2876 Sunridge Way NE
Process & Analytical Instruments
Division
Calgary, AB T1Y 7H9
Canada
Attention: Allan Delesoy

The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSA


Mark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for
Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' for
US only or without either indicator for Canada only.

Jay McVeigh
Issued by: Jay McVeigh

PRODUCTS
CLASS 2258 02 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations
CLASS 2258 82 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations -
Certified to US Standards

Class I, Division 2, Group ABCD; Ta -20°C to +50°C; T4


Ex nA IIC T4; Ta -20°C to +50°C
Class I, Zone 2 AEx nA IIC T4; Ta -20°C to +50°C; IP20

Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer; Rated 120/240Vac, 50/60Hz, 300W max

Notes:

DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 1

Specifications | 2-9
Certificate: 2568583 Master Contract: 164369

Project: 2568583 Date Issued: July 25, 2013

• 9900RM shall be housed in an enclosure with a minimum IP54 rating or location providing equivalent
protection.
• Product bearing the Main Board 301-2681 Revision D and Assembled Board 100-2380 Revision E have been
successfully evaluated to Standards 142 and 508 only
• Product bearing the Main Board 301-2681 Revision E and Assembled Board 100-2380 Revision F have been
successfully evaluated to Standard 61010

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
CAN/CSA- C22.2 No 0-10 - General Requirements � Canadian Electrical Code Part II.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 0.4-04 - Bonding of Electrical Equipment
C22.2 NO. 142-M1987 - Process Control Equipment
C22.2 NO. 213-M1987 - Non Incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous
Locations Industrial Products
CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-1-12 - Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control,
and Laboratory Use - Part 1: General Requirements

CAN/CSA-C22.2, No. 60529:05 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)


CAN/CSA-C22.2, No. 60079-0:11 - Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements
CAN/CSA-C22.2, No. 60079-15:12 - Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of
protection ‘n”
IEC 60529, Ed. 2.1 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

UL 508, 17th Edition (2005) - Industrial Control Equipment


ANSI/ISA-12.12.01-2012 - Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II,

UL 60079-0’ 5th Edition - Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements
UL 60079-15: 4th Ed. - Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection ‘n”

DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 2

2-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


CSA Certificate, Ordinary Locations

Certificate of Compliance
Certificate: 2554141 Master Contract: 164369

Project: 2554141 Date Issued: July 16, 2013


Issued to: Ametek Canada Inc
2876 Sunridge Way NE
Process & Analytical Instruments
Division
Calgary, AB T1Y 7H9
Canada
Attention: Allan Delesoy

The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSA


Mark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for
Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' for
US only or without either indicator for Canada only.

Alan McLaughlin
Issued by: Alan McLaughlin, P.Eng.

PRODUCTS
CLASS 2252 06 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
CLASS 2252 86 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Certified to US Standards

Process Spectrometer, Model 9900 RM, Rack mount Rated 120V, 50/60Hz, 240V, 50/60Hz 300W max, Type 1,
IP20.

Notes:
• The above model is cord or permanently connected, Equipment Class I, Pollution Degree 2, Installation
Category II.
• Mode of operation: Continuous
• Environmental Conditions: 0°C to 50°C, 2000 m max, 95% rH;

DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 1

Specifications | 2-11
Certificate: 2554141 Master Contract: 164369

Project: 2554141 Date Issued: July 16, 2013

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
CSA Standards:
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-12 - Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General Requirements
UL Standards:
UL Std. No. 61010-1 (3rd Edition) - Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1: General Requirements

DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 2

2-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


ATEX Certificate

Specifications | 2-13
2-14 | Model 9900RM Analyzer
IECEx Certificate

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
IEC Certification Scheme for Explosive Atmospheres
for rules and details of the IECEx Scheme visit www.iecex.com

Certificate No.: IECEx CSA 15.0011X Issue No: 0 Certificate history:


Issue No. 0 (2015-07-23)
Status: Current Page 1 of 4

Date of Issue: 2015-07-23

Applicant: AMETEK Canada LP


2876 Sunridge Way NE.
Calgary AB. T1Y 7H9
Canada

Electrical Apparatus: Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer


Optional accessory:

Type of Protection: Ex nA

Marking:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
120/240Vac, 50/60Hz, 300W max.
Tamb: -20°C to +50°C or 0°C to +50°C *
Note:
* - Tamb = 0°C to +50°C is only for analyzer with HMI Display or Oxygen Sensor.

Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Dorin Stochitoiu


Certification Body:

Position: Technical Advisor

Signature:
(for printed version)

Date:

1. This certificate and schedule may only be reproduced in full.


2. This certificate is not transferable and remains the property of the issuing body.
3. The Status and authenticity of this certificate may be verified by visiting the Official IECEx Website.

Certificate issued by:

Specifications | 2-15
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx CSA 15.0011X Issue No: 0

Date of Issue: 2015-07-23 Page 2 of 4

CSA Group
178 Rexdale Boulevard
Toronto, Ontario M9W IR3
Canada
and
1707 - 94th Street
Edmonton, AB T6N 1E6
and
8503 East Pleasant Valley Road,
Independence, Ohio, USA
44131-5516
Canada

2-16 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx CSA 15.0011X Issue No: 0

Date of Issue: 2015-07-23 Page 3 of 4

Manufacturer: AMETEk Canada LP


2876 Sunridge Way NE.
Calgary AB. T1Y 7H9
Canada

Additional Manufacturing
location(s):

This certificate is issued as verification that a sample(s), representative of production, was assessed and tested and found to comply with the
IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer's quality system, relating to the Ex products covered by this certificate, was assessed and
found to comply with the IECEx Quality system requirements. This certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx
Scheme Rules, IECEx 02 and Operational Documents as amended.

STANDARDS:
The electrical apparatus and any acceptable variations to it specified in the schedule of this certificate and the identified documents, was
found to comply with the following standards:

IEC 60079-0 : 2011 Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: General requirements


Edition:6.0
IEC 60079-15 : 2010 Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
Edition:4

This Certificate does not indicate compliance with electrical safety and performance requirements other than those expressly included in the

Standards listed above.

TEST & ASSESSMENT REPORTS:


A sample(s) of the equipment listed has successfully met the examination and test requirements as recorded in

Test Report:

CA/CSA/ExTR15.0009/00

Quality Assessment Report:

NL/DEK/QAR12.0037/01

Specifications | 2-17
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx CSA 15.0011X Issue No: 0

Date of Issue: 2015-07-23 Page 4 of 4

Schedule

EQUIPMENT:
Equipment and systems covered by this certificate are as follows:

The AMETEK Model 9900 RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer is an UV process spectrometer that is primarily used for measuring
concentrations of gases or liquids in the range from ppm to percent. It is used primarily in the chemical industries. In the standard fixed
filter configuration, the analyzer measures at two discrete wavelengths, while in the optional motorized filter wheel configuration it uses
a maximum of six discrete wavelengths. The product is enclosed in a 19-inch rack-mountable enclosure made of 2mm thick aluminum
with optional an approved third party Human Machine Interface display on the front panel. The analyzer is comprised of two UV light
sources, a Filterblock that houses two (motorless filter, or “single-species”, version) to six (motorized filter wheel – multi-species or
multi-range version) wavelength selective filters, a Beamsplitter, front surfaced mirrors, a Measuring Cell, and two matched
Photodetectors.

CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION: YES as shown below:

The equipment shall be installed in an enclosure that provides a degree of protection not less than IP 54 in accordance with IEC
60079-15 and IEC 60079-0, and accessible only with use of a tool or key.
The equipment shall only be used in an area of not more than pollution degree 2, as defined in IEC 60664-1.
Transient protection shall be provided that is set at a level not exceeding 140% of the peak rated voltage value at the supply terminals
to the equipment.

2-18 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Analyzer Marking

MODEL: 9900RM XXX XXX


S/N: XX-9900-XXXXX-X
DATE: YYYY / MM / DD
VOLTAGE: 120VAC 240VAC 50/60Hz 300W Max
SEE NOTE RATINGS: Ta 0°C to 50°C IP20
MAX PRESS: XXXXX
APPROVAL: Class I, Div 2, Groups A,B,C,D T4

Ex nA IIC T4
C US Class I, Zone 2, AEx nA IIC T4
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
IECEx CSA 15.0011X
DEKRA 15ATEX0118 X

AMETEK Canada LP
2876 Sunridge Way N.E., Calgary, AB T1Y 7H9 CANADA
Phone: 403-235-8400 Fax: 403-248-3550 301-3069-F
Toll free (in North America): 1-800-661-9198

NOTES:
IF AN O2 SENSOR AND DISPLAY ARE NOT INSTALLED,
TEMPERARURE RATING IS: Ta -20°C TO 50°C.

Specifications | 2-19
This page intentionally left blank.

2-20 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


INSTALLATION and START-UP

This chapter contains information about the following topics:

• Where to find safety information in this guide before working with


the analyzer.

• How to store the analyzer before installation.

• How to unpack and inspect the analyzer for damage before installa-
tion.

• Tools, equipment, and supplies required for installation.

• How to install the mechanical components and gas lines, and perform
a leak check on all of the fittings and connections before powering up
the analyzer.

• How to make all of the required electrical connections.

• How to apply power to the analyzer and configure it for operation.

• What to expect during normal operation.

! The installation of the analyzer must be in accordance with all of the


customer and local regulatory standards and procedures. There are no
WARNING
operator-serviceable components inside the analyzer. Refer all servic-
ing to qualified personnel.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-1


Safety Considerations
Before beginning the installation of the analyzer and before power-
 ing it up, review and follow all safety information under “Electrical
NOTE
Safety,” “Grounding,” “Personnel and Equipment Safety Informa-
tion,” “Warning Labels,” and “Special Warnings and Information”
following the Table of Contents near the beginning of this manual.
This information describes procedures to follow to avoid personal
injury and/or damage to the equipment. All regulatory agency and
personnel safety procedures for your jurisdiction must be followed.

Pre-Installation Requirements

Storage Prior to Installation


If the analyzer is stored for any period of time prior to installation, it
must be housed in a temperature-controlled environment where it is not
subject to dripping or splashing liquids, corrosive gases, high humidity, or
excessive heat or cold. Recommended storage conditions include:

Temperature: 0 °C to 50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F)


Relative Humidity: < 70 %

Failure to comply with these storage conditions will void your warranty.

Uncrating and Inspecting the Analyzer

! Lift the analyzer out of its shipping container only by grasping it


from the sides or bottom. Do not use the handles on the front of the
CAUTION
analyzer to lift it out of its shipping container, or to transport it.

Upon receiving the analyzer system, remove it from the shipping con-
tainer and check the exterior of the analyzer for damage. Remove the
top cover from the Analyzer Enclosure and check all of the components
within the enclosure to ensure they are secure and there is no physical
damage.

3-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Tools, Equipment and Supplies Required for Installation
To install the analyzer you need the following tools, equipment, and supplies:

• Set of open-end wrenches, set of metric hexagonal wrenches, and set


of metric ball drivers.

• Wire Cutters, strippers, and crimpers.

• Flat blade instrument screwdriver.

• Wrist Strap (for grounding).

• For Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers Only:


One power-disconnect explosion-proof switch (breaker), rated for
appropriate supply voltage at the installation site and certified for the
hazardous location (to satisfy local electrical codes, the switch must be
certified by the local authority for the appropriate hazardous loca-
tion). The power-disconnect switch (breaker) must be connected to
and mounted in a safe area near the analyzer (within 3 metres/9.84
feet), in an easily accessible area. The switch (breaker) must be clearly
labeled (e.g., “AMETEK Model 9900 Analyzer Main AC Power Discon-
nect Switch”). For safety reasons during maintenance, this switch
allows the main AC power to be disconnected from the analyzer prior
to performing service on the analyzer. This switch (breaker) is to be
supplied and installed by the customer/end user.

Strain relief, to install in Division 2/Zone 2 Termination Enclosure (on


the AC Power Distribution/MOV board) to secure the AC Power wir-
ing. Supplied/installed by the customer/end user.

• Plugs (supplied by AMETEK) for each unused Cable Entry Port (120 V
analyzers have ½" NPT cable entries; 240 V analyzers have M20 cable
entries). Customer/end user required to supply/install cable glands
that meet the requirements of local wiring regulations and electrical
codes.

• Detergent-based leak detector (Snoop® or another suitable leak detec-


tion agent is permissible).

• A supply of ¼" non-rigid tubing, such as Teflon, for the Sample and
Vent gas lines. Length will vary, depending on the distance between
the analyzer and the sample extraction and dispersal points. Ap-
propriate ferrules for the tubing material must be used. Supplied/in-
stalled by the customer/end user.

• A supply of ¼" non-rigid tubing, such as Teflon, for the Calibration


and Zero gas lines. Length will vary, depending on the distance
between the analyzer and the Calibration and Zero gas cylinders.
Appropriate ferrules for the tubing material must be used. Supplied/
installed by the customer/end user.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-3


Installing the Mechanical Components
While installing the mechanical components, refer to the associated illus-
trations for the dimensions and locations of components.

Installing the Analyzer


The complete analyzer is contained within a standard enclosure. For Rack
Mount applications, a slide mount will be mounted on each side of the
analyzer. See Figure 3-1 for analyzer dimensions, Figure 3-2 for the layout
of the internal components, and Figure 3-3 for the Rear Panel Layout.

All external connections to the analyzer are made through the Rear Panel.
When mounting the analyzer into a rack, allow sufficient room behind the
analyzer for the Sample Line and Vent Line and for the cable or conduit
carrying wiring to the input/output signal terminal strips inside the ana-
lyzer.

When chassis slides are used the Sample and Vent Line tubes, Ethernet
cable, and signal cable(s) must be flexible and long enough to allow re-
moval of the analyzer from the rack.

The AC Power cable is routed into the Analyzer Enclosure through the
Cable Entry Ports at the analyzer Rear Panel and terminated at the AC
Power Distribution/MOV board.

The valve configuration and the flow control associated with the sample,
Zero, and Calibration gases are to be supplied by the customer.

Location and Environment

The entire analyzer system can be mounted in a rack or in a specially


designed cabinet or shelter. In all cases, the analyzer system must be
installed indoors to ensure it is protected from harsh environmental ele-
ments.

 Regardless of which installation method is used, be sure to install the


analyzer in a location that is as free as possible from vibrations.
NOTE

The surrounding ambient temperature of the analyzer should be main-


tained between 0–50 °C (32–122 °F).

Division 2/Zone 2 Applications:


The enclosure provides ingress protection IP20 per IEC 60950. The cus-
tomer is required to provide additional ingress protection to IP54 when
installing in Division 2 or Zone 2 classified hazardous areas.

3-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure 3-1.
Analyzer dimensions.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-5


Figure 3-2.
Analyzer internal component
layout, all options.

3-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure 3-3.
Rear Panel Layout,
Cable Entry Ports.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-7


Installing the Sample System

!All regulatory agency, personnel safety procedures, and installation/


removal procedures must be followed during the installation/removal
WARNING
of the sample system components. A breathing apparatus must be
worn when installing/removing equipment from the sample gas
extraction point. The sample stream may be under positive pressure,
and injury or death from inhaling toxic gases in the sample stream
could result from attempting to install/remove equipment without the
use of a breathing apparatus.

Sample Prerequisites

The following are typical conditions which the sample gas must meet:

• The dewpoint temperature of all components in the sample must be


lower than the lowest expected operating temperature of the Measur-
ing Cell (i.e., components of the sample gas mixture must not con-
dense within the analytical system).

• When introduced into the analyzer, the pressure and temperature


of the Calibration Gas mixture should be as close as possible to the
temperature and pressure that will exist in the Measuring Cell during
normal operation of the analyzer.

• The sample gas should be free of particulate materials.

• The maximum allowable pressure is the lesser of 275 kPag (40 psig);
35 kPag (5 psig) if the optional Paramagnetic O2 Sensor is installed;
or the maximum pressure rating of any optional pressure measuring
device that is installed.

• The typical sample flow rate should be 0.5–5.0 L/min (1.0–10.0 scfh).

The volume of the sample system will affect the response time of the over-
all system.

3-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Installing and Connecting the Sample and Vent Lines

The analyzer is supplied with Sample Line Inlet and Vent Line Outlet con-
nection fittings, which are mounted on the analyzer Rear Panel (Figure
3-3). Unless otherwise specified, the sample system fittings are ¼" Swa-
gelok® connectors.

 The connectors required for connecting to the customer’s sample sys-


tem are also ¼" Swagelok® tube fittings.
NOTE

Appropriate ferrules for the tubing material must be used – supplied


by customer.

Install the Zero gas line at the same time as you make the Sample and
Vent Line connections to the analyzer.

To install the Sample and Vent Lines:

1. Route the Sample Line from the analyzer to the gas sample probe on
the stack.

Route the Vent Line (if used) from the analyzer to the gas dispersal
location (vent to atmosphere).

Ensure there are no loops, sags, or other traps in the Sample and Vent
Lines. Provide support where needed.

2. Make the connection for the Sample Line at the analyzer and at the
gas sample probe.

Make the connection for the Vent Line at the analyzer and at the dis-
persal location (vent pipe to atmosphere).

 If solenoids are added to the sample system to control the flow of


sample and calibration gases, it is the responsibility of the customer.
NOTE

Installation and Start-Up | 3-9


Connecting the Zero Gas
The analyzer is supplied with a Zero gas inlet con­nection fitting, which is
mounted on the analyzer Rear Panel (see Figure 3-3).

 The connector required for connecting the Zero gas to the analyzer is
a 1/8" Swagelok® tube fitting.
NOTE

Install the Zero gas line at the same time as you make the Sample and
Vent Line connections to the analyzer.

Zero gas connection requirements:

• The Zero gas must be dry and must not contain any components
which absorb ultraviolet light (radiation) at the wavelengths em-
ployed by the analyzer, nor contain any components which might
react with components in the sample gas mixture. Nitrogen (UHP) or
Instrument Air (as per ANSI/ISA S7.0.01 (1996) Quality Standard for
Instrument Air) that meets these requirements are suitable for use as a
Zero gas for the analyzer.

 If an optional O2 Sensor is installed, Instrument Air cannot be used


as Zero gas; nitrogen must be used.
NOTE

• A supply of 1/8" non-rigid tubing, such as Teflon, for the Zero gas line.
Length will vary, depending on the distance between the analyzer
and the Zero gas cylinder. Appropriate ferrules for the tubing material
must be used. Supplied/installed by the customer/end user.

• Adjust the Zero gas pressure to <5 PSIG at 2 SCFH prior to initiating
an Auto-Zero.

To install the Zero gas line:

1. Route the Zero gas line from the analyzer to the Zero gas cylinder.

2. Connect the Zero gas line to the Zero gas cylinder and to the Zero gas
inlet on the Rear Panel of the analyzer (see Figure 3-3).

3-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Digital Communication
The analyzer may be configured to communicate simultaneously via its
RS-485 serial port and its Fast Ethernet connection.

 Contact your Network Administrator for information about proper


settings required to establish Modbus and Ethernet communications.
NOTE

! Always disconnect the main AC power to the analyzer before opening


any covers/doors on the analyzer, before making any wiring or cable
WARNING
connections, and before removing any components from the analyzer.

If using the USB connection, confirm the USB Flash Drive or cable
is secured in place (Figure 3-4).

For Division 2/Zone 2 analyzers, the USB Flash Drive is secured in


the USB port with a Locking Clip.

Connections for Modbus® RTU on the RS-485

The RS-485 terminals on the Customer I/O board can be used for remote
communication with a Distributed Control System (DCS), Data Acquisi-
tion System (DAS), or Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) using Modi-
con Modbus® RTU protocol. The Modbus® RTU protocol can be used with
the analyzer operating as a slave device, responding to Modbus queries
within one second, and providing full access to all registers.

For analyzers using the Customer I/O board (typical default):


Connect a customer supplied serial cable (4‑wire or 2-wire multi-drop
connection with signal ground, maximum 1200 m) between the customer
DCS, DAS, or PLC and the RS‑485 terminals on this board (TB1).

For analyzers using the Bench Controller board:


Connect a customer supplied serial cable between the DCS, DAS, or PLC
and J502 on the Bench Controller board.

 After the analyzer installation is complete (including all I/O Signal,


Relay Contact, and AC Power connections), configure and enable the
NOTE
RS-485 port for Modbus® communications as described in “Start-Up
and Verification” (Powering Up the Analyzer) later in this chapter.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-11


Connections for Modbus® TCP on Ethernet (Optional)

When using the Ethernet interface (using Modbus-TCP) on the analyzer,


the minimum requirements for the Ethernet cable is a CAT 5e cable to
connect the analyzer to the network, up to a maximum of 100 m from the
hub/switch/router. The Ethernet interface supports a 10Base-T/100Base-TX
connection.

When used via the analyzer HMI, this option provides read access to data
and status registers. The system is limited to calibration command write.

When used via the optional Modbus gateway, this option provides full
access to the registers, and the ModbusRTU-over-RS485 becomes unavail-
able.

Connect the Ethernet cable between the RJ-45 Ethernet port on the back
of the analyzer (see Figures 3-3) and the network.

 After the analyzer installation is complete (including all I/O Signal,


Relay Contact, and AC Power connections), configure and enable the
NOTE
Ethernet parameters.

Removing/Replacing the USB Flash Drive

The USB Flash Drive comes inserted in the analyzer HMI’s USB port on
the bottom of the HMI (inside the analyzer enclosure). This procedure
describes how to safely remove and replace the USB Flash Drive when
upgrading the HMI-Display firmware, or in the event of a USB Flash
Drive failure. Otherwise, removing the USB drive is not recommended.
To remove/install a USB Flash Drive in the USB port on the HMI (use of
Locking Clip required for Division 2/Zone 2) – Figures 3-4.1 and 3-4.2:
1. Power down the analyzer and then remove the screws that secure the
top cover on the analyzer electronics enclosure.
2. Press the yellow “PRESS TO OPEN” button on the top of the HMI to
disengage the Communication module from its HMI Display. Careful-
ly back out the Communication module from its HMI Display, taking
care not to drop it or pull the wiring harnesses from the module.
3. Turn the Communication module slightly to allow access to the USB
Drive (and its Locking Clip – Division 2/Zone 2). (Division 2/Zone 2:
remove the Locking Clip.) Pull the USB Drive out of its port. Note the
orientation of the text on the USB Drive.
4. Obtain the new USB Drive (note the orientation) and insert it in the
USB port. (Division 2/Zone 2: Replace the Locking Clip.)

3-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


5. Position the Communication module over its connector on the HMI
Display and with steady, even pressure, press the Communication
module toward the analyzer front cover/HMI until it engages (clicking
sound) with its HMI Display.
6. Replace the screws to secure the top cover on the analyzer electronics
enclosure.

Figure 3-4.1.
USB Port location, inside
front cover of analyzer.

Figure 3-4.2.
USB Locking Clip.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-13


Connecting I/O Signals, Relay Contacts, and AC Power
120 V analyzers are supplied with ½" NPT cable entries; 240 V analyz-
 ers are sup­plied with M20 cable entries. Plug each unused Cable Entry
NOTE
Port with an appropriate threaded plug (supplied by AMETEK).

Shielding is not required to maintain EMC compliance. If shielded


cable is used it should be terminated only at the end of the user device.
The cable glands do not need to be metal, but they must meet the
requirements of local wiring regulations and electrical codes.

If solenoids are added to the sample system to control the flow of


sample and calibration gases, it is the responsibility of the customer.

Input/Output Signal and Relay Contact Connections


The terminal blocks for connection to the digital input and output signals,
analog output signals, and the status relay contacts are located on the
Customer I/O board. Refer to Figure 3-3 for the location of Cable Entry
Ports, and to Figures 3-6, 3-7.1, and 3-7.2 for the connection points.

To terminate the input/output signals and relay contacts:

1. Remove the Rear Access Plate to access the Customer I/O board.

2. Route cable or conduit carrying the input/output and relay contact


wiring to the Cable Entry Ports at the analyzer Rear Panel.

Route the wiring through one of the Cable Entry Ports and then to the
Customer I/O board.

Connect the conduit or cable gland to the Cable Entry Ports, and then
terminate the wiring at the Customer I/O board using the supplied
connectors (blank connectors inserted in the Customer I/O board).

3-14 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure 3-5.
Customer I/O board.

ANALYZER CONNECTIONS CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS


ANALYZER STATUS ALARM
TB4

TB-A
ANALYZER CALIBRATION STATUS

TB3
DRY CONTACT INPUTS

TB2

ANALOG OUTPUTS

HMI

TB1
RS-485 COMMUNICATION

TB7
RELAY CONTACTS

TB6
DRY CONTACT INPUTS

Figure 3-6.
Customer Connections.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-15


AC Power Connection
The operating voltage of the analyzer is indicated on the Product Label on
the analyzer Rear Panel. Verify the operating voltage on the label agrees
with the operating voltage indicated on the documentation supplied with
the analyzer. If there is a discrepancy, contact the local distributor or the
factory.

! Never operate the analyzer with the protective ground disconnected;


doing so will void the warranty.
CAUTION

General Purpose (GP) Applications

To connect AC Power to the GP analyzer:

Connect the supplied power cord to the Power Entry Switch on the ana-
lyzer Rear Panel and to an appropriate power source.

! Power cord must be approved for use by local regulations.


WARNING

Power Cord Rating:


120 V: 125 V, 18 AWG, 10 A, 80 °C Minimum
240 V: 250 V, 1.0 mm, 16 A, 80 °C Minimum

Division 2/Zone 2 Applications

Division 2/Zone 2 analyzers have a Gland Plate on the analyzer Rear Panel
(see Figure 3-3). These analyzers do not have the Power Entry Switch
Plate (including AC Power Switch and AC Plug Connector) on the analyz-
er Rear Panel; therefore, an external power-disconnect switch (supplied
by customer/end user) is required to turn the analyzer power On/Off.
See “Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers” under “Tools, Equipment and Supplies
Required for Installation” earlier in this chapter for more information.

To connect AC Power to the Division 2/Zone 2 analyzer:

1. Remove the top cover from the Analyzer Enclosure.

2. Remove the M20 or ½" plug from the AC Power Gland Plate.

3-16 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


3. Route the AC Power wiring (approved by local wiring regulations and
electrical codes) to the power-disconnect switch and make the connec-
tions.

Route the AC Power wiring from the power-disconnect switch to the


analyzer.

 The power-disconnect switch (breaker) must be connected to and


mounted in a safe area near the analyzer (within 3 metres/9.84 feet),
NOTE
in an easily accessible area. The switch (breaker) must be clearly la-
beled (e.g., “AMETEK Model 9900 Analyzer Main AC Power Discon-
nect Switch”).

For safety reasons during maintenance, this switch allows the main
AC power to be disconnected from the analyzer prior to performing
service on the analyzer.

4. At the analyzer, use a certified cable gland (supplied by customer/


end user) with the AC Power Wiring and connect the cable gland to
the Power Entry Gland Plate. Route the AC wiring to J101 on the AC
Power Distribution/MOV board and terminate the wiring.

Install strain relief (supplied by customer/end user) to secure the AC


Power wiring.

5. Terminate the wiring to the external power-disconnect switch.

6. Connect an earth ground to the analyzer enclosure (typical: inside


rear panel). See Figure 3-7.2.

7. Replace the top cover on the Analyzer Enclosure.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-17


HMI UNIT (DISPLAY)
HEATER KIT,
A 120 V OR 240 V
B

24VDC TB-A CAL RELAY


TB-A

OPTICAL BENCH
BOARD

TB-A DIODE

TERMINAL
BLOCK
"TB-A"

PMT SUPPLY
BOARD

PMT SIGNAL
BOARD

Figure 3-7.1.
Analyzer Wiring
Diagram, Sheet 1 of 2.

3-18 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


OPTIONAL
CUSTOMER
I/O BOARD

Figure 3-7.2.
Analyzer Wiring
Diagram, Sheet 2 of 2.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-19


Pressure Leak Check
The analyzer has been checked for sample system leaks at the factory as
part of AMETEK’s quality assurance procedures. However, since fittings
may loosen during transport, and the Sample Line, Vent Line, and Zero
Gas lines are installed on-site, it is important that you perform a leak
check on the entire sample system prior to powering up the analyzer for
the first time, or following the replacement of any lines/fittings or Measur-
ing Cell parts.

! Preventing leaks in the sample handling system is critical to ensure


proper analyzer operation. If sample gas migrates into the Optical
CAUTION
Bench Assembly or Reflector Block due to a leak in the Measuring
Cell, the optics will become damaged and most likely require replace-
ment. Most leaks are preventable with the regular replacement of the
Measuring Cell o-rings.

1. Connect Zero Gas to the Sample Inlet fitting and plug the Sample
Outlet.

2. Adjust the Zero Gas pressure within the Measuring Cell approximate-
ly 65 kPa (10 psi) above the expected Measuring Cell operating pres-
sure.

! Do not exceed 100 kPag (15 psig) if the Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor
is installed.
CAUTION

Do not exceed the pressure rating of any installed pressure measuring


device.

Do not exceed 275 kPag (40 psig) under any conditions.

3. Using standard leak detection procedures check all Sample/Vent Line


connections and the Measuring Cell for leaks.

4. If a leak is detected, carry out the appropriate repair procedure.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all leaks have been fixed.

6. The analyzer leak check is complete. After turning off the Zero Gas
and slowly relieving the pressure, disconnect the Zero Gas and re-
move any plugs or caps installed for the leak check.

! Reduce the pressure slowly and under control.


CAUTION

3-20 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Start-Up and Verification
This section describes equipment and controls on the analyzer system that
require adjustments and settings before, during, and after power-up.

Powering Up the Analyzer


When powering up the analyzer, certain checks should be performed
to ensure the analyzer is operating properly. These checks are discussed
in the following procedure. If there are problems encountered during
power-up, refer to the “Start-Up Diagnostics Checklist” following these
procedures for help in diagnosing and correcting problems.

! Hazardous Locations
Do not cycle the analyzer power on if there is a hazardous gas atmo-
WARNING
sphere present, unless a power-disconnect switch (approved for the
Hazardous Area) has been installed for use with the analyzer.

Before applying power to the analyzer, test the area around the ana-
lyzer for hazardous gases and proceed only when the area is found to
be safe.

To apply power to the analyzer:

1. General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the On
position. This will also apply power to the Human-Machine Interface
(HMI).

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the On position. This
will also apply power to the Human-Machine Interface (HMI).

When the HMI is powered up, the message “Connecting to UV


bench...” is displayed (Figure 3-8).

If this screen does not appear within approximately 30 seconds, cycle the
analyzer power Off then On again. If this screen still does not appear,
check the AC power connections to the analyzer, and the 24 VDC Power
Connector on the HMI unit (from the Power Supply). If there is still no
response from the analyzer, contact the local distributor or factory.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-21


Figure 3-8.
HMI-Display, establishing
communications with the
analyzer’s Bench Controller
board is in progress.

If the communications cable is not connected between the analyzer


and the HMI, the message “UV BENCH NOT CONNECTED TO
HMI UNIT” will appear (Figure 3-9). Check the communications cable
(Cable 6) from the HMI and ensure it is properly connected to the
analyzer (at J501 on the Bench Controller board) and to COM1 on the
HMI. Refer to Figures 3-2 and 3-7.1/3-7.2 for the location of the Bench
Controller board and cable connections points, and check the cable
connection at the HMI.

Figure 3-9.
HMI-Display,
failure to establish
communications with
the analyzer’s Bench
Controller board.

If the communications cable is properly connected between the Bench


Controller board and the HMI, the display will power up properly and
will automatically switch to the home screen (Figure 3-10). Refer to the
section “Working From the HOME Screen” in Chapter 4 for details on
working from the HMI.

3-22 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure 3-10.
HOME screen, Model
9900 Analyzer.

2. Allow the analyzer to stabilize for approximately 30 minutes before


continuing.

3. If the DIAG menu button on the home screen is flashing it indicates


there are active Fault or Warning status conditions (some of which
may be due to cold analyzer temperature zones). View the active
status conditions from the UV Bench Status diagnostic screen to

Status
DIAGUV Bench check for status code names. Refer to Chapter 6 for complete status
condition descriptions and corrective action to take to correct the
conditions. Temperature-related conditions will clear after the
analyzer has warmed up to normal operating temperature.

4. If using the DCS RS-485 port for Modbus® communications, check the
settings:

a. First, ensure the serial cable is connected between the Modbus


Host (DCS, DAS, or PLC) and TB1 on the Customer I/O board (or
J502 on the Bench Controller board if using this board for the con-
nections).

b. From the home screen press the CONFIG button to view the
 The Level2 password
is required to make changes
Configuration sub-menu. Press the UV Bench Modbus button to
view the UV Bench Modbus Communication screen.
to the UV Bench Modbus
Communication screen.
 For details about the parameters on this screen, refer to “Viewing and
Changing UV Optical Bench Modbus Communication Parameters”
NOTE
in Chapter 4.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-23


 CONFIGUV Bench
Modbus

Figure 3-11.
UV Bench
Communication
Configuration screen.

c. If changes are required:

• To make changes to the Modbus Node Address, tap the white


numeric field to display a numeric keypad. Enter the desired
value and then press the ENT key.

! Since the HMI uses the same Modbus Node Address to communicate
with the UV Bench, changing the UV Bench Modbus Node Address
CAUTION
will necessitate changing the HMI Modbus communication setup
in order to reestablish communication between the HMI and the UV
Bench. Refer to “Changing the Modbus Node Address” in Chapter 4
for information about how to change the HMI Modbus communica-
tion settings.

• To make changes to the DCS Port Baud Rate, DCS Port Par-
ity, or DCS Port Stop Bits settings, tap the drop-down list and
then tap a selection from the list. Press the blank ( ) button
beside the drop-down list to change it to a check mark (  ),
which enables the parameter.

After making changes, press to send the new values to the


analyzer. Or, press to refresh (reset) the parameters to their
original settings (cancels the changes).

If the settings are okay, continue with this procedure.

To return to the previous screen press . To return to the home


screen, press the home ( ) button.

3-24 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


d. If any of the serial parameters have been changed (i.e., Parity,
Data Bits, Baud Rate, and Stop Bits), save the changes to nonvola-
tile memory, and then reset the analyzer by cycling the AC power
Off/On. This is necessary to ensure these changes are updated in
the analyzer.

5. Set the HMI Date and Time to local time. For information about how
to change the HMI Date and Time, refer to “Viewing and Changing
HMI Date\Time” in Chapter 4.

6. Set the nominal Measuring Cell Pressure and Temperature to correspond


with your process conditions. For information about how to change
these settings refer to “Viewing and Changing Sample Cell Parameters”
in Chapter 4.

7. Enter the calibration gas concentration(s), as described under “Span-


Calibrate the Analyzer and View the Results” in Chapter 5.

8. From the home screen, view the species and parameters that have
been selected for display at the factory.

9. Perform a manual Zero on the analyzer and then, optionally, perform


a manual Span. These procedures are described under “Manual Zero
and Span Calibration” in Chapter 5.

After the calibration, note the time the analyzer takes to display a
stable concentration value. The response time should be approximate-
ly 30 seconds or less (excluding the external sample system).

The analyzer is ready to begin sampling gas.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-25


Start-Up Diagnostics Checklist
This checklist describes problems that may be encountered while power-
ing up the analyzer and/or preparing it for normal operation. If the ana-
lyzer experiences problems during power-up, review this checklist and
perform the corresponding corrective action to fix any problems.

Problem Encountered
The normal HMI start-up sequence of the message “Connecting to UV
bench...” appearing on the HMI-Display followed by the home screen ap-
pearing do not appear immediately after applying AC power.
Corrective Action
Take all necessary precautions and check the AC wiring to ensure it is prop-
erly connected.

Problem Encountered
During the normal HMI start-up sequence (“Connecting to UV bench...”
message on the HMI) the error message “UV BENCH NOT CONNECTED
TO HMI UNIT...” appears on the HMI instead of the home screen appear-
ing.
Corrective Action
Take all necessary precautions and ensure the connectors on all cables be-
tween the HMI and the analyzer are properly connected, and check these
cables for damage. Replace the cables if damaged.

Problem Encountered
Flashing DIAG button (RED or ORANGE) on the home screen.
Corrective Action
Check the UV Bench Status diagnostic screen to view current status condi-

Status
DIAGUV Bench tions.
Certain status conditions will be active until the analyzer has warmed up to
normal operating temperature, at which time they should clear automatically.
Refer to “Analyzer Diagnostic Status Codes, Trigger Conditions, and Cor-
rective Action” in Chapter 6 for complete status condition descriptions and
corrective action to take to correct the status conditions.

3-26 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Problem Encountered
One or both source lamps are not firing. Note that the lamps are almost com-
pletely covered by a housing, but a flashing orange glow will be visible when
looking at the lamp from the socket end.
Corrective Action
Take appropriate safety precautions and check for proper wiring connections.
If the wiring is okay, check the connections of the lamps in their sockets. Re-
view the section titled “Replacing the Source Lamps” in Chapter 6 and make
adjustments to the lamps. Perform an Auto Setup, if necessary, to ensure the
lamps are operating at peak efficiency.

Recalibrating the Analyzer


The Model 9900 Analyzer has been calibrated at the factory for your re-
quested range or a default range.

If the analyzer will be used to measure a sample concentration which


is significantly different from that of the original (factory-set) range,
AMETEK recommends re-spanning the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 2 for
analyzer ranges and Chapter 5 for detailed information about how to
calibrate the analyzer.

To recalibrate the analyzer:

1. Enter the concentrations of the components in the Calibration Gas


mixtures before performing the Zero/Span functions.

2. Connect (or turn on) the Zero Gas to the analyzer and perform a
manual Zero.

3. Connect (or turn on) the Span Gas to the analyzer and perform a
manual Span.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-27


Normal Operation
After the analyzer is set up and started, the analyzer ’s HMI defaults to the
home screen. During normal operation, the home screen displays the
real-time analysis results and optional measurements on the screens. The
HMI is updated every two seconds.

 IMPORTANT
To help you determine in the future if there are problems with your
NOTE
analyzer, it is important to observe and record initial readings (when
the analyzer sample system is clean) of the PMT (photomultiplier
tube) signals for each filter and the sample response time.

Also record the date the analyzer was commissioned for operation
to help you determine lamp age, which can be helpful if diagnosing
problems with the analyzer. Whenever lamps are replaced, record the
date for future reference.

Monitoring Analyzer Performance


The Model 9900 Analyzer has a USB port on the bottom of the HMI, which
is accessible by removing the top cover from the Analyzer Enclosure.

! For Division 2/Zone 2 analyzers, ensure the USB Flash Drive is


secured in the USB port with its Locking Clip.
WARNING

Pre-defined parameter groups are logged continuously on the HMI. The


data for these parameter groups can be graphed on the display. Refer to
“Viewing Data Trending Diagnostic Information” in Chapter 6 for more
information about graphing data.

The data – which the HMI stores for the last 12 hours, at 1-minute inter-
vals – can also be saved to a USB Flash Drive.

Observe and record the signals every month to monitor signal strength.
Make the first recording after commissioning the analyzer for operation.

 It is important to record these values each month immediately after a


manual Zero function to simulate the same conditions during the origi-
NOTE
nal recordings. If the values are recorded using the sample gas, the results
may be skewed because the composition of the gas can vary. All signals
should return to within 5 % of the values recorded the previous month.

3-28 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Recording Initial Sample Response Time
The analyzer’s sample response time can be used for two functions. One
function is to help you set the sample gas flow rate. The other function
is to help you determine if the typical response time is increasing, which
may indicate a plug in the sample system.

Typically, a good response time is approximately 30 seconds (excluding


the external sample system) when the sample system is clean and op-
erating at peak efficiency (response time may vary due to Sample Line
length).

To check and record the initial sample response time:

1. Manually Zero the analyzer. Refer to “Manual Zero and Span Calibra-
tion” in Chapter 5 for information about how to perform a manual
zero.

2. After the Zero is complete, return the gas flow to Sample Gas. View
the home screen and observe the output concentration. Record the
time it takes the analyzer to display the first concentration reading.

 It is important to record the response time only after performing a


manual Zero to simulate the same conditions during the original
NOTE
recordings.

3. If the sample response time is adequate, no further adjustment is nec-


essary.

4. Record the response time in a log book every month.

Installation and Start-Up | 3-29


Analyzer Configuration
An Analyzer Configuration Report (called “9900_Analyzer CFG Report”) is
included in the analyzer Documentation Package. This document lists the
factory-default configuration settings of all programmable parameters for
the analyzer.

Changes to the analyzer configuration settings can be made, saved, or


restored while working from the HMI.

3-30 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


USER INTERFACE

This chapter contains information about the following topics:

• An introduction to the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) layout.

• How to work from the touchscreen color HMI and navigate through
the various screens.

• Working from and returning to the home screen.

• How to view analyzer data, configure analyzer settings, and perform


analyzer functions.

Before working from the HMI, read the entire section titled
 “Introduction to the Human-Machine Interface (HMI)” to learn
NOTE
how to navigate through the screens to view data, to learn how
to make changes to analyzer settings, and to learn how to initi-
ate analyzer functions.

This chapter also includes the S9900_HMI Menu Map, which is a


navigational tool that lists and illustrates the entire menu structure of
the HMI. A laminated copy of the this Menu Map is shipped with the
analyzer.

User Interface | 4-1


Introduction to the Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
The analyzer HMI-Display (Figure 4-1) is a graphical touchscreen that
allows you to view integral analyzer data and diagnostic information,
configure analyzer settings, and perform various system operations and
calibration functions. The HMI displays live values of the UV species be-
ing measured (two or more for multi-species or multi-range analyzers;
one for single-species analyzers), plus the live value from optional, in-
stalled sensors (e.g., O2, Cell Pressure, Flow Rate).

Sensor Results

Analysis Results

Analyzer Communications
Status Indicators
Figure 4-1.
HMI layout, HOME
screen.

Analyzer HMI Time/Date Main Menu

 The HOME screen areas listed in Figure 4-1 are described under
“Working From the HOME Screen” later in this chapter.
NOTE

4-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Working From the HMI
While working from the HMI, the following rules apply:

• From the home screen, navigate through the various screens by


pressing the corresponding Main Menu button or navigation button.
While each Main Menu screen is active, sub-menu buttons for those
functions are displayed. Press the corresponding sub-menu button to
access related information or setup screens.
• While working from the Main Menu or Sub-Menu screens, the follow-
ing navigation buttons are available:

Press this button to return to the previous screen.

Press this button to advance to the next screen.

Press this butto­n to initiate analyzer functions such as calibrations


and the Auto Setup.
Press this button to cancel analyzer functions such as when a
calibration or Auto Setup is in progress.
Selection is enabled. Press this button to disable a selected option;
the button will change to to indicate the selection is disabled.

Press this button to refresh/recall parameter values from the analyzer.

Press this button to apply/send the changes of parameter values to


the analyzer. The blinking orange asterisk serves as a reminder that
changes to analyzer settings have been made on the HMI but not
sent to the analyzer.
Press this button to return to the HOME screen from any HMI screen.
This is also an analyzer status indicator: analyzer is operating under
normal conditions (sampling gas with no warnings or faults).
This is an analyzer Status Code indicator: the analyzer is operating
 For information about
how to set up Status Codes
with a Warning status (ORANGE = warning).

as either Fault or Warning This is an analyzer Status Code indicator: the analyzer is operating
conditions, refer to “Relay with a Fault status (RED = fault).
Output Setup” in this chapter.
Selection is disabled. Press this button to enable an option; the button
will change to to indicate the selection is enabled.

Press this button to expand or decode the associated value.

 When the button text or symbol is greyed out the button is not available for
the functions on that screen. See examples below.
NOTE

User Interface | 4-3


• To return to the home screen from any screen, press the home
( ) button.

 (Example) CONFIG

 HMI Navigation:
While working from the HMI, use these navigational aids to quickly access
Main Menu screens, Sub-Menu screens, or analyzer information from the
UV AnalysisSample Cell HOME screen. See example at left.
Conditions
• Live values on the screens are updated every two seconds. When
switching to a different screen, it may take up to two seconds for a
new set of values to be displayed.

• If the display is left at a screen other than the home screen for 30 min-
utes without activity the display will switch back to the home screen.

• To adjust the display brightness level:

1. Tap the top-left corner of the display screen area, followed by the
top-right corner of the screen (within one second) as illustrated in
Figure 4-2. The brightness/contrast control adjustment bar will ap-
pear at the bottom of the screen. This can be done from any screen.

2. Press the ‘+’ key to increase the brightness level or the ‘-’ key to
decrease the brightness level.

3. After the display has been adjusted to the desired level, press Can-
cel ( ) to close the adjustment bar.

Figure 4-2.
Adjusting the HMI
display brightness level. Brightness / Contrast Control Bar

4-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


• Parameter values with a white background (numeric field) on the
screens allow changes to be made to the settings. These changes can
be either numeric values from a numeric keypad (see example Figure
4-3.1), text from an alphanumeric keypad (see example Figure 4-3.2),
or selections from a drop-down list (see example Figure 4-4).

To change numeric values while working from the HMI:

1. Tap the numeric field to display a numeric keypad (Figure 4-3.1).

2. Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value (including deci-
mal, if required) and then press the ENT key.

3. Press the Apply/Send ( ) button (flashing) to send the changes to


the analyzer.

 To reestablish the previous settings (from the analyzer), press the


NOTE Refresh ( ) button before pressing the button.

 (Example) CONFIG
Temperature Control
Numeric field

Figure 4-3.1.
Changing values in a
numeric field, example.

User Interface | 4-5


 (Example) CONFIG
UV AnalysisSpecies Name
Alphanumeric field

& Unit

Figure 4-3.2.
Changing values in
an alphanumeric field,
example.

To change a setting from a drop-down list:

1. Tap the drop-down list and then tap a selection from the list.

2. Press the blank ( ) button beside the drop-down list to change it


to a check mark ( ), which enables the parameter.

3. Press the Apply/Send ( ) button to send the change to the ana-


lyzer.

Drop-down list

 (Example) CONFIG
UV Bench Modbus

Figure 4-4.
Choosing a setting
from a drop-down list,
example.

4-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Entering Passwords to Change Analyzer Parameter Settings

To make changes to parameters from the Configuration menu, a pass-


word must first be entered. When you press CONFIG from the HOME
screen, the ENTER PASSWORD keypad appears. Enter the Level1 or
Level2 password and press ENT to set the analyzer in Configuration
mode. If you exit CONFIG mode you will have to reenter the password to
enable CONFIG mode.

Different levels of passwords are required to change different configura-


tion parameter settings:

• A Level1 password (1 3 5 7) is required to make changes to UV Bench,


Customer I/O, Temperature Control, Sensor, and Track-Hold param-
eters.

• A Level2 password (2 4 6 8) is required to make changes to UV Analy-


sis, UV Bench Modbus and HMI Date\Time parameters. If you enter
this password, access to all Level1 parameters is also allowed.

Figure 4-5.
Enter Password keypad.

User Interface | 4-7


Changing the Modbus Node Address

To change Modbus Node Address that the HMI uses to communicate with
the UV Bench:

1. Tap the top-right corner of the display screen area, followed by the
bottom-left corner of the screen (within one second). The system
menu bar will appear at the bottom of the screen.

2. Press the Offline button.

3. Press the Peripheral button at the top of the menu bar.

4. Press the Device/PLC Settings button.

5. Press the MODBUS SIO MASTER COM1 button.

6. Press the Device button.

7. Tap the Slave Address numeric field and enter the new Modbus Node
Address of the UV Bench.

8. After changing DCS Modbus serial port settings, press the Back but-
ton twice to return to the Peripheral Settings menu.

9. Press the Save button to save the new settings.

10. Press the Exit button to exit the offline mode and reboot the HMI unit.

4-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Upgrading HMI-Display Unit Firmware

! Hazardous Locations
Do not remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, do not cycle the ana-
WARNING
lyzer power On or Off, and do not attempt to connect or disconnect
the USB Flash Drive (or cable) to or from the USB port on the HMI if
there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

Before connecting a USB Flash Drive (or cable) to the USB port on
the HMI, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous gases and
proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

For Division 2/Zone 2 analyzers, the USB Flash Drive is secured in


the USB port with a Locking Clip.

To upgrade the HMI-Display unit firmware via the USB port:

1. Unzip the Pro-face HMI software programming file onto the root
directory of a USB Flash Drive.

! Before continuing with Step 2, power down the analyzer/HMI unit


and then disconnect the HMI’s Communication module from its HMI
WARNING
Display to allow access to the USB Flash Drive.

See “Removing/Replacing the USB Flash Drive” in Chapter 3 for in-


formation on how to safely remove and replace the USB Flash Drive.

2. With the HMI unit powered down, remove the factory-installed USB
Flash Drive from the HMI’s USB port on the bottom of the HMI and
insert the USB Flash Drive (with the firmware upgrade files) into the
HMI’s USB port.

3. Power up the HMI unit.

After the HMI-Display has established communications with the


analyzer, view the HMI Offline menu by first tapping the top-right
corner of the display screen area, followed by the bottom-left corner of
the screen (within one second). The HMI unit system menu bar will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.

4. Press the CF/USB button.

5. Press the USBStart button.

User Interface | 4-9


6. The HMI unit will reboot and then display the Memory Loader Tools
screen. (If necessary, choose the appropriate language by pressing the
selection arrow button and then choosing the language of choice.)

7. Press the Download (USB->Display) button.

8. Press the Start button.

9. When prompted to download the data, press the Yes button.

10. The process of copying from USB Flash Drive to the HMI unit takes
a few minutes. When the process finishes the message “Successfully
Completed” will be displayed.

11. Press the Back button repeatedly to return to the Memory Loader
Tools screen.

12. Press the Exit button to exit the Memory Loader Tools screen.

13. When prompted to reboot the system, press the No button. The HMI
unit will need to be rebooted before operation, but this will be done
upon power up after replacing the factory-installed USB Flash Drive.

! Before continuing with Step 14, power down the analyzer/HMI unit
and then disconnect the HMI’s Communication module from its HMI
WARNING
Display to allow access to the USB Flash Drive.

See “Removing/Replacing the USB Flash Drive” in Chapter 3 for in-


formation on how to safely remove and replace the USB Flash Drive.

14. Remove the USB Flash Drive, reinstall the factory-installed USB Flash
Drive, and replace the top cover on the analyzer electronics enclosure.

15. Power up the analyzer/HMI unit. The system will reboot with the new
HMI firmware programming file.

4-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Summary of Analyzer Operation
Upon analyzer startup, the configuration settings that existed prior to the
previous shutdown are loaded into the analyzer’s memory. A printout
of the original factory settings, called “9900_CFG Report” is included in
the analyzer Documentation Package. This document includes the factory-
default configuration settings of the variables associated with Communica-
tions, Analyzer Operating States, Inputs, Outputs, Relays, Lamp Control,
Heater Set Points and Control, the analytical functions, and various other
parameters.

A substantial subset of these parameters can be changed from the HMI


through the config menu.

User Interface | 4-11


Figure 4-6.
shipped with the analyzer.
A laminated copy of
the S9900_HMI Menu Map is

S9900_HMI Menu Map.


HOME

4-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


CAL DIAG CONFIG
Manual Manual
Zero-CAL Span-CAL
UV Bench Customer Temperature
Setup I/O Control
Sensor Track
Zero-CAL Span-CAL Setup & Hold
Results Results Auto
Setup
Analog Output Analog Output Contact Input
Zero-CAL Span-CAL
AUTO-CAL Setup Calibration Setup
Offsets Offsets
Auto Setup UV UV Bench HMI
Results
Analysis Modbus Date\Time
Analog Output
Auto Auto Zero Auto Zero Assignment HMI Analog
Zero Setup Results Align Code Output Setup
Lamps [NOx]
Relay Output Sample Cell
Setup Conditions Save\
Concentration Algorithm
Series 9900_HMI Menu Map

Restore
Selection
Photometric
PMT Lamp PMT\Motor
Status Trigger HMI NOx
Signals Ops Ops Sensor Setup Factors
Filter
Bench Ops 1 Coefficients
Bench Ops 2 StatusCode1 Linear PSWD
UV Analysis Sensor Trigger Setup Coefficients Setup
Trans\Abs (1/2) Absorbance
Results Signals
Offsets
StatusCode2 StatusCode1 Species
Trigger Setup Trigger Setup Name & Unit
System System Data (1/2) (2/2) Analysis
Info Status Trending Matrix
through the sub-menus of each of the three main menus.

StatusCode2 StatusCode3
Trigger Setup Trigger Setup
Hardware Wavelength Species UV Analysis UV Bench Sensor (2/2) (1/2) Row1 Row5
Presence Valid Valid Results Signals Signals

StatusCode3
S Standard menu screen
Row2 Row6
UV Analysis UV Bench Trigger Setup
Sensor Signal
StatusCode1 StatusCode2 StatusCode3 Results Signal (2/2) S Optional menu screen
Trend Graphs
(1/2) (1/2) (1/2) Trend Graphs Trend Graphs Row3 Row7
Use the Model 9900 Analyzer (HMI) Menu Map to help you navigate

S Item expansion\decode screen


StatusCode1 StatusCode2 StatusCode3 Row4 Row8
(2/2) (2/2) (2/2) W Pop-up window

9900RM Analyzer Menu Map


PN 903-8727, Rev C
Working From the HOME Screen

The home screen displays the process concentration values (e.g., SO2 and
O2) and the status of integral analyzer/system information. This screen
also contains the Main Menu buttons that allow you to access other
screens to view analyzer data, configure analyzer settings, and perform
analyzer functions.

Descriptions of the information on this screen are described below and in


the following pages.

Sensor Results

Analysis Results

Analyzer Communications
Status Indicators

Figure 4-7.
HOME screen.

Analyzer HMI Time/Date Main Menu

Analysis Results (top-left portion of display)


This area displays the real-time concentrations of the UV species being
measured (up to eight) and the units of measurement. For systems re-
quiring Low/High Range measurement the species is shown twice (see
Figure 4-7), with the lower case species (e.g., so2) being Low Range
and the upper case species (e.g., SO2) being High Range.
Sensor Results (top-right portion of display)
This area displays the real-time temperatures and pressures monitored
and/or controlled by the analyzer, flow rate, and Oxygen sensor-related
values. The values displayed here depend on the optional sensors
installed.
BoardT
Displays the real-time temperature measured by a digital tempera-
ture sensor on the Bench Controller board. This can be used as an
indication of the temperature (°C) inside the Analyzer Enclosure.
BenchT
Displays the real-time temperature (°C) of the Optical Bench, as
measured by the Bench Temperature Sensor.

User Interface | 4-13


CellT
Displays the real-time temperature (°C) of the Measuring Cell, as
measured by the Cell Temperature Sensor. (Optional Measuring
Cell Temperature Sensor must be installed.)

CellP
Displays the real-time pressure (mmHg) of the sample gas in the
Measuring Cell. (Optional pressure transducer must be installed.)

Flow
Displays the real-time flow rate (litres per minute) being measured
by the (optional) Flow Sensor. (Optional Flow Sensor must be
installed.)

O2–%
Displays the real-time concentration (%) being measured by the
O2 Sensor. (Optional O2 Sensor must be installed.)

O2–T
Displays the real-time temperature (°C) being measured by the O2
Sensor. (Optional O2 Sensor must be installed.)

Analyzer Communications Status Indicators (middle, lower-right portion


of display). These indicators alert the operator to analyzer and system
status.
HMI-Ctrler Comm
When this indicator light is GREEN, it means that the HMI Con-
troller has established communications with the Bench Controller
board. In this condition, the operator can communicate with the
analyzer via the HMI.

When this indicator light is RED, it means that communications


between the HMI and the Bench Controller board have been dis-
rupted (e.g., cable is disconnected). In this condition, the operator
cannot communicate with the analyzer via the HMI.

ZSolCtrl (Optional Integrated Auto-Zero function must be enabled)


When this indicator light is GREEN, it means that the Zero So-
lenoid is under analyzer Automatic Control. When ORANGE, it
means the Zero Solenoid has been forced to OFF (de-energized).
When RED, it means the Zero Solenoid has been forced to ON
(energized).

4-14 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


CAL
When this indicator light is BLUE, it means that an analyzer
Calibration action is in progress. Calibration can be initiated by a
digital (dry contact) input, via Modbus communication, on a timed
schedule, or manually.

The Calibration time remaining (seconds) is displayed on the Cali-


bration menu (see CAL Averaging Duration in Figure 5-1 in this
Supplement).

Initiation via dry contact is only available when using the Cus-
 CONFIGCustomer
I/OContact Input Setup
tomer I/O board. View the Contact Input Setup screen to view the
input assigned for calibration initiation. Refer to the section “Con-
tact Input Setup” in this chapter for more information about this
screen.

Logging to USB
When this indicator light is BLUE, it means the operator has initi-
ated Data Trend logging from the analyzer to the USB Flash Drive.

For more information about Data Trending and logging, refer to


the section “Viewing Data Trending Diagnostic Information” in
Chapter 6.

Main Menu buttons (bottom-right portion of display)


The CAL, DIAG, and CONFIG buttons provide access to correspond-
ing Main Menu screens and related sub-menus, where you can view
data, configure various settings, calibrate the analyzer, diagnose prob-
lems with the analyzer, and initiate various settings.

The DIAG button can also alert you to status conditions:

• If this button is WHITE, the status is normal; no Warning or Fault


conditions have been detected.

• If this button is ORANGE and flashing, a Warning condition has


been detected.

• If this button is RED and flashing, a Fault and/or a Warning condi-


tion has been detected.

User Interface | 4-15


Configuration screens and their sub-screens (sub-menus) are de-
scribed later in this chapter.

Calibration screens and associated functions, and procedures to cali-


brate the analyzer, are described in Chapter 5.

Diagnostic screens and associated functions, and procedures to take


correct Status Code conditions generated by operating parameters
that exceed factory-set parameter setpoints or generated by problems
with the electronics, are described in the section “Troubleshooting and
Diagnostics” in Chapter 6.

Analyzer HMI Time/Date (bottom-left portion of display)


This displays the current analyzer HMI time and date.

4-16 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing Analyzer Data, Configuring Analyzer Settings, and
Performing Analyzer Functions
This section discusses how to view data, view and change settings, and
initiate certain analyzer functions. Other functions such as calibrating the
analyzer is discussed in Chapter 5, while viewing and transferring diagnos-
tic data, and troubleshooting analyzer problems is discussed in Chapter 6.

Configuring Analyzer/System Settings


The CONFIGURATION menu provides access to the sub-menus that allow
 A Level1 or Level2
password is required to
you to view or set up parameters that control the operation of the analyzer.
view and make changes
to parameters on the
Configuration screens.
! The settings for your analyzer have been configured at the factory
to meet specified customer requirements. Changing the factory-set
CAUTION
configuration could cause the analyzer to operate incorrectly. Consult
with AMETEK before making any changes.

Figure 4-8.
Configuration menu.

To access the CONFIG menu to view or make changes to UV Bench,


Customer I/O, Temperature Control, Sensor, and Track-Hold parameters,
enter the Level1 password (1 3 5 7).

To view or make changes to UV Analysis, UV Bench Modbus, and HMI


Date\Time parameters, enter the Level2 password (2 4 6 8). If you enter
this password, access to all Level1 parameters is also allowed.

To access the Password Setup screen, press the PSWD Setup button. See
“Entering Passwords to Change Analyzer Parameter Settings” earlier in
this chapter for more information. Detailed descriptions of each sub-menu
– and the parameters under each – are listed in the following pages.

User Interface | 4-17


Viewing UV Bench Setup Parameters

The UV Bench Setup screen allows you to initiate an Auto Setup, align
the source lamps, and view the results of the Auto Setup, plus view cer-
tain Auto Setup related values.

 The functions and information on this screen are primarily used as


part of general maintenance; therefore, see “Source Lamps Replace-
NOTE
ment” in Chapter 6 for detailed descriptions of working from this
screen.


Setup
CONFIGUV Bench

Figure 4-9.
UV Bench Setup
Configuration sub-
menu.

Target PMT Signal


This is the maximum PMT signal level (volts) that will be used dur-
ing the Auto Setup (range is 0–10 V). AMETEK does not recommend
adjusting this value from the factory default setting.

Max Lamp Pulse


This is the maximum pulse current used during the Auto Setup. This
is the current that will be applied to the key filter. AMETEK does not
recommend adjusting this value from the factory default setting.

Lamp1 Base
Lamp2 Base
This is the lamp base current (mA) for Lamps 1 and 2. This is the “sim-
mer” current when the lamp is not being pulsed. AMETEK does not
recommend adjusting this value from the factory default setting.

4-18 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Customer I/O Parameters

The Customer I/O setup sub-menu allows you to view and change the
settings of the analyzer’s inputs and outputs. From this screen, press the
button for the inputs or outputs you wish to change and make the chang-
es. Each setup option is discussed in the following pages.

 CONFIGCustomer I/O

Figure 4-10.1.
Customer I/O
Configuration sub-
menu.

User Interface | 4-19


Analog Output Setup

The Analog Output Setup screen allows you to view and change the ana-
log outputs that are displayed, and modify the output settings.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup

Figure 4-10.2.1.
Analog Output Setup
Configuration screen.

 If changing a channel’s output setting from voltage to current, or


NOTE
current to voltage, the corresponding dip switch on the Customer I/O
board must first be changed to the required setting, followed by chang-
ing the Type[switch] setting on the screen. Finally, change the Range
parameter to the desired setting.

If the output Type is changed, the channel must be re-calibrated. Refer


to “Analog Output Calibration” later in this chapter and “Calibrate
the Analog Outputs” in Chapter 5 for details about how to calibrate
the analog outputs.

­­

To change analog output settings:

1. First, assign a signal to an analog output channel by entering a Mod-


bus Register number in the Assignment field. To determine the Regis-
ter numbers, press to view the Analog Output Assignment Code
sub-menu (Figure 4-14.2.2), which lists the available screens (by but-
ton name). Each screen lists Assignment codes for the corresponding
Modbus Register Address. Enter these codes to assign analog outputs
to Channels 1–4 (these screens are illustrated in the following pages).
If an output channel is not used, assign ‘0’ to the corresponding As-
signment field.

Tap the Assignment field for the analog channel, to display a numeric
keypad. Enter the Assignment Code and press ENT to accept the
change. Repeat this step to configure other output channels.

4-20 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


2. Next, change the low Scale and/or high Scale output value for each
output, if required, and press ENT to accept the change. Repeat this
step to change the low and/or high Scale values for other outputs.

3. Select an output Type (switch), either mA or V, by tapping beside the


desired Output Type.

4 Next, select the Range by tapping the desired option. If mA is selected


the Range options are 4-20 or 0-20 mA. If V is selected the Range op-
tions are 1-5 or 0-5 V.

5. To clamp the output to the selected Range, press the clamp out-
put button to change it to , which indicates it is enabled.

6. After the changes have been made, press to save the new values,
or press to refresh the changes.

The Analog Output Assignment Code sub-menu allows you to view the
codes for all analyzer signals that are available to be assigned to an analog
output channel. These codes are the corresponding Modbus Register Ad-
dress numbers for the analyzer signals.

For example, to assign the Measuring Cell temperature to Analog Out-


put 1, press the Sensor button to view the Sensor assignment codes and
note the code for Cell temp (71). Return to the Analog Output Setup
screen and enter “71” in the Assignment field for Analog Output 1.

If necessary, refer to the Modbus Register® Map (Appendix B) for


 more information about the assigned signals and their Register Ad-
NOTE dress numbers.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup

Figure 4-10.2.2.
Analog Output Assignment
Code Configuration
sub-menu.

User Interface | 4-21


Concentration
This screen displays the assignment codes for the Live and Track-Hold
(T-H) concentrations of each species being measured.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup
Concentration

Figure 4-10.2.3.
Concentration assignment
codes.

Photometric
This screen displays the assignment codes for Photometric measure-
ments of Absorbance (Abs) and Transmittance (Trans).

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup
Photometric

Figure 4-10.2.4.
Photometric assignment
codes.

4-22 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Sensor
This screen displays the assignment codes for the measurements of
the different sensors. (Optional sensor(s) must be installed.)

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup
Sensor

Figure 4-10.2.5.
Sensor assignment
codes.

Bench Operations, Screen 1


This screen displays the assignment codes for signal measurements of
the Photomultiplier Tube Measure (msrPMT) and Reference (refPMT)
voltage (mV), and the lamp pulse voltage (HV) and Current for each
lamp\filter combination.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup
Bench Ops:1

Figure 4-10.2.6.
Optical Bench
Operations assignment
codes, screen 1 of 2.

User Interface | 4-23


Bench Operations, Screen 2
This screen displays the assignment codes for signal measurements
of the lamp base (L1 base/L2 base) voltage (HV) and Current, the
high voltage control of Measure PMT (msrPMT) and Reference PMT
(refPMT), and the revolutions per minute (RPM) of the Filter Wheel
Motor and the Filter Wheel.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output Setup
Bench Ops:2

Figure 4-10.2.7.
Optical Bench
Operations assignment
codes, screen 2 of 2.

4-24 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Relay Output Setup

The Relay Output Setup setup screen allows you to view and change the
status indicated by the relay output.

After changes have been made, press to save the new values, or press
to refresh the changes.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup

Figure 4-10.3.1.
Relay Output
Configuration screen.

Status indicated by relay


To configure how the relay outputs will be activated on the Custom-
er I/O board and be displayed on the HMI, press the button next to
each status indicator. The button will change to to indicate the status
indicator is enabled, and will be included in the triggering of the relay.
Example 1:
To trigger when there is a fault status condition, a warning status con-
dition, or calibration in progress, ensure the check mark is enabled
next to these three selections.
Example 2:
To trigger when there is a fault status condition, enable the check
mark only next to the fault status selection.

fault status
The relay will be triggered if any system fault status condition is
triggered within the analyzer. The analyzer requires service. The
relay can only be reset by correction of the condition causing the
fault status.

warning status
The relay will be triggered if any warning status condition is trig-
gered within the analyzer. The analyzer requires attention. The
relay will reset automatically upon correction of the condition
causing the warning status.

User Interface | 4-25


calibration in progress
The relay will be triggered if the analyzer is in a calibration state.

bench setup in progress


The relay will be triggered if the UV Optical Bench Auto Setup has
been initiated.

Status Trigger Setup


Press this button to view the Status Trigger Setup sub-menu (Figure
4-14.3.2). From this screen, press the buttons to view the Status Code
Trigger Setup screens, where you can set up how each detectable con-
dition will trigger a Warning or Fault status.

The different Status Code Trigger Setup screens are shown in the
following pages. After changes have been made, press to save the
new values, or press to refresh the changes.

Refer to the section “Troubleshooting and Diagnostics” in Chapter 6


for more information about the status conditions and the suggested
corrective actions to take to reset them.

Each Status Code Trigger Setup screen lists the error conditions de-
tectable by the analyzer. Each detectable error condition can be in-
cluded ( ) or excluded ( ) in triggering the Warning (ORANGE
light) or Fault (RED light) status.

For example, to enable the “PMT data not received” status condition
(Figure 4-14.3.3) to trigger the Fault status, press the (disabled) but-
ton to change it to (enabled) and tap the ORANGE light to change
it to RED.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger Setup

Figure 4-10.3.2.
Status Trigger Setup
sub-menu.

4-26 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger SetupStatus
Code 1 (1/2)

Figure 4-10.3.3.
Status Code 1 Trigger
Setup screen (1 of 2).

 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger SetupStatus
Code 1 (2/2)

Figure 4-14.3.4.
Status Code 1 Trigger
Setup screen (2 of 2).

 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger SetupStatus
Code 2 (1/2)

Figure 4-10.3.5.
Status Code 2 Trigger
Setup screen (1 of 2).

User Interface | 4-27


 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger SetupStatus
Code 2 (2/2)

Figure 4-10.3.6.
Status Code 2 Trigger
Setup screen (2 of 2).

 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger SetupStatus
Code 3 (1/2)

Figure 4-10.3.7.
Status Code 3 Trigger
Setup screen (1 of 2).

 CONFIGCustomer
I/ORelay Output Setup
Status Trigger SetupStatus
Code 3 (2/2)

Figure 4-10.3.8.
Status Code 3 Trigger
Setup screen (2 of 2).

4-28 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Analog Output Calibration

The Analog Output Calibration setup screen allows you to calibrate the
analog outputs. For details about how to calibrate the analog outputs,
refer to the section “Calibrate the Analog Outputs” in Chapter 5.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output
Calibration

Figure 4-10.4.
Analog Output
Calibration
Configuration screen.

User Interface | 4-29


Contact Input Setup

The Contact Input Setup screen displays the action assigned to each con-
tact input. When the contact input closes, the analyzer will perform the
action assigned. After changes have been made, press to save the new
values, or press to refresh the changes.

For example, to assign Zero-CAL UV to Input 1, enter “10” in the Input 1


action code field. To assign T-H (Track-Hold) operation to Input 2, enter
“101” in the Input 2 action code field.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OContact Input Setup

Figure 4-10.5.
Contact Input Setup
screen.

4-30 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Temperature Control Parameters

The Temperature Control setup screen displays the current control set-
tings for each temperature-controlled zone. From this screen, you can
change the settings for each zone. The zones displayed on this screen cor-
respond with the type of optional (installed) temperature sensors, and are
controlled by the analyzer.

The temperature-controlled zones for the analyzer are:


• Bench (Optical Bench zone) – Standard installation
• Cell (Measuring Cell zone) – Optional Measuring Cell heater must be
installed

If required, make changes to the values and press to save the new
values, or press to refresh the changes.

 CONFIGTemperature
Control

Figure 4-11.
Temperature Control
Configuration screen.

Setpoint (C)
This is the control operating setpoint (°C) for each temperature-control
zone. Enter “0” to disable a temperature-control zone.

Kp (C)
This is the proportional gain (°C) for each temperature-control zone.
AMETEK does not recommend adjusting this value from the factory
default setting.

Ti (sec)
This is the integral time (seconds) for each temperature-control zone.
AMETEK does not recommend adjusting this value from the factory
default setting.

User Interface | 4-31


To set up temperature-control zone parameters:

1. Tap the Setpoint field to display a numeric keypad.

2. Change the Setpoint value and press ENT to save the change. Repeat
this step for other temperature-control zones and other parameters on
this screen.

4-32 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Optional Sensor Parameters

The Sensor Setup screen displays configuration parameters and allows


you to change the settings for optional sensors integrated with the ana-
lyzer. To disable a sensor, set its high scale value to ‘0’.


Setup
CONFIGSensor

Figure 4-12.
Sensor Setup
Configuration screen.

Cell Pressure (mmHg)


Displays the Cell Pressure Low Scale and High Scale values. (Op-
tional pressure transducer must be installed.)

Flow Rate (L/min)


Displays the Flow Rate Low Scale and High Scale values. (Optional
Flow Sensor must be installed.)

O2 Concentration (%)
Displays the O2 Concentration Low Scale and High Scale values.
(Optional O2 Sensor must be installed.)

To set up sensor scaling parameters:

1. Tap the setpoint field for the value you wish to change. A numeric key-
pad will be displayed.

2. Change the Low Scale and/or High Scale values for Cell Pressure,
Flow Rate, and/or O2 Concentration. After the changes have been
made, press to save the new values, or press to refresh the
changes.

User Interface | 4-33


Viewing and Changing Track-Hold Parameters

The Track-Hold setup screen displays the Hold Time (sec) for which the
concentration value for each species will be held constant during a zero-/
span-calibration. It retains this value for the duration of the zero-/span-
calibration, at which time it will resume outputting live results. See Figure
4-13.2 for two examples of Track-Hold Timing diagrams.

 Track-Hold applies to analog outputs and the Track-Hold registers


only.
NOTE

 CONFIGTrack-Hold

Figure 4-13.1.
Track-Hold
Configuration screen.

To change the Hold Time (sec):

1. Tap the Hold Time field for the value you wish to change. A numeric
keypad will be displayed.

2. Enter a new value (seconds) and press to save the new values, or
press to refresh the changes.

4-34 | Model 9900RM Analyzer








 


  



  



  

 








  




  

Figure 4-13.2. 


Track-Hold Timing 
diagram examples.   


User Interface | 4-35


Viewing and Changing UV Analytical Parameters

The UV Analysis setup screen allows you to view and set up Measuring
(Sample) Cell conditions, current algorithm selections, filter coefficient
values, linear coefficient values, absorbance offsets, species name and
unit, and analysis matrix.

 CONFIGUV Analysis

Figure 4-14.1.
UV Analysis
Configuration sub-
menu.

4-36 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Sample Cell Parameters

The Sample Cell Conditions setup screen displays Measuring (Sample)


Cell information, and allows you to set parameters that will be used to
compensate the species concentrations for Measuring Cell temperature and
pressure variations.

! The settings for your analyzer have been configured at the factory to
meet specified customer requirements. Changing the factory-set con-
CAUTION
figuration could cause the analyzer to operate incorrectly.

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisSample Cell
Conditions

Figure 4-14.2.
Sample Cell Conditions
Configuration screen.

Cell Length (cm)


This is the axial length of the Measuring Cell gas space, displayed in
cm. Do not adjust this value from the factory default setting.

Nominal Cell Pressure (mmHg)


This is the nominal pressure value in the Measuring Cell, displayed
in mmHg. Adjust this value from the factory default setting to the
process condition at startup or when process conditions change.

If dynamic Cell Pressure Compensation is selected, the value displayed


here is used in triggering pressure related status conditions.

If static Cell Pressure Compensation is selected, the value displayed


here is used to calculate the concentration (this value can be modi-
fied).

User Interface | 4-37


Nominal Cell Temperature (°C)
This is the nominal temperature value in the Measuring Cell, dis-
played in °C. Adjust this value from the factory default setting to the
process condition at startup or when process conditions change.

If dynamic Cell Temperature Compensation is selected, the value


displayed here is used in triggering Cell temperature related status
conditions.

If static Cell Temperature Compensation is selected, the value dis-


played here is used to calculate the concentration (this value can be
modified to suit ambient temperature conditions).

Compressibility Factor
In addition to pressure and temperature compensations of the concen-
trations according to the ideal gas law, it is possible to enter an ad-
ditional parameter (Z) to account for the compressibility factor of the
sample gas. One value of Z is used for all species. The default value
for this parameter is ‘1’, but can be any value between 0.5 and 1.5.
AMETEK does not recommend adjusting this value from the factory
default setting. The correction is applied to the concentrations in the
following manner:

<Conc>corr. = <Conc>uncorr. / Z

To set up Measuring Cell temperature and pressure compensation param-


eters:

 Dynamic Temperature & Pressure compensation are available only if


a Measuring Cell Temperature Sensor or pressure transducer, respec-
NOTE
tively, was installed at the factory or retrofitted later.

The compensation functions are enabled and disabled individually


(i.e., either temperature compensation, pressure compensation, or both
can be enabled).

1. For the Cell Temperature Compensation, change the switch to the


dynamic or static position.

For the Cell Pressure Compensation, change the switch to the dynamic
or static position.

2. Press the Apply/Send ( ) button (flashing) to send the changes to


the analyzer, or press to refresh the changes.

4-38 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Analyzer Algorithm Selections

The Algorithm Selection screen is for use by service personnel during di-
agnosis, and can be disregarded by users. Do not alter the selections made
on this screen, unless instructed to do so by AMETEK. The button
indicates the algorithm is enabled.

! The settings for your analyzer have been configured at the factory to
meet specified customer requirements. Changing the factory-set con-
CAUTION
figuration could cause the analyzer to operate incorrectly.

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisAlgorithm Selection

Figure 4-14.3.
Algorithm Selection
Configuration screen.

NDR Compensation
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform the Neutral Drift com-
pensation.

Linearization-1
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform for linearization-1 calcula-
tion.

Linearization-2
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform for linearization-2 calcula-
tion.

User Interface | 4-39


NOx Measurement
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform NOx measurement calcu-
lation. [This function is available only for analyzers with a motorized
filter wheel.]

SO2 Dual Range


Select this to enable the analyzer to measure dual-range (high and
low range) SO2. [This function is available only for analyzers with a
motorized filter wheel.]

SO2 Extended-Range
Select this to enable the analyzer to measure extended-range (higher
than typical range) SO2. [This function is available only for analyzers
with a motorized filter wheel.]

SO2 Crosstalk
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform SO2 Crosstalk Correction.
[This function is available only for analyzers with a motorized filter
wheel.]

MeSH Correction
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform methyl mercaptan
(MeSH) measurement corrections. [This function is available only for
analyzers configured to measure MeSH.]

Hot Application
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform additional calculations in
a hot, wet gas sample. [This function is available only for analyzers
with an optional Oven.]

Liquid Application
Select this to enable the analyzer to perform additional calculations for
a liquid sample.

4-40 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Analyzer Filter Coefficients

The Filter Coefficients setup screen allows you to view and change the
adaptive filtering parameters, Sigma and Minimum Gain, for Absorbance
Filter and Neutral Drift Filter.

! Do not change the values from the factory default settings unless
advised to do so by AMETEK.
CAUTION

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisFilter Coeff.

Figure 4-14.4.
Filter Coefficients
Configuration screen.

User Interface | 4-41


Viewing and Changing Analyzer Linear Coefficients

The Linear Coefficients setup screen displays the linearization coefficients


that are used to provide polynomial correction in the data analysis. These
coefficients are used by linearization-1 and linearization-2 algorithm.

! Do not change the values from the factory default settings unless
advised to do so by AMETEK.
CAUTION

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisLinear Coeff.

Figure 4-14.5.
Linear Coefficients
Configuration screen.

4-42 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Absorbance Offsets

The Absorbance Offsets setup screen displays the absorbance offset factor
for each lamp\filter combination being used.

! Do not change the values from the factory default settings unless
advised to do so by AMETEK.
CAUTION

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisAbsorbance Offsets

Figure 4-14.6.
Absorbance Offsets
Configuration screen.

User Interface | 4-43


Viewing and Changing Species Name & Unit

The Species Name & Unit setup screen displays the species (name) be-
ing measured by the analyzer, the unit of measurement for each species
(PPMV, %, etc.), and the conversion factor (e.g., 1 = PPMV (1 x 104 = %))
for each species.

! Do not change the values from the factory default settings unless
advised to do so by AMETEK.
CAUTION

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisSpecies Name &
Unit

Figure 4-14.7.
Species Name & Unit
Configuration screen.

To change the species Name, Unit, or Conversion Factor:

1. Tap the Name or Unit field to display an alphanumeric keypad, or the


Conversion Factor field to display a numeric keypad.

2. Use the keypad to enter/change the information and then press the
ENT key.

3. Press the Apply/Send ( ) button (flashing) to send the changes to the


analyzer.

 To reestablish the previous settings (from the analyzer), press the


Refresh ( ) button before pressing the button.
NOTE

4-44 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing and Changing Analysis Matrix

The Analysis Matrix setup screens display information that is responsible


for partially calculating the concentration output and negating the effects
of cross-talk by interfering gas species. Each row displays information for
each species being measured (including NDR). To view the matrix infor-
mation for a species, select the corresponding button.

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisAnalysis Matrix

Figure 4-14.8.1.
Analysis Matrix
Configuration
sub-menu.

Each Matrix screen displays the value for each lamp\filter combination, for
that species, in the calculation matrix. To view information for other spe-
cies, return to the Analysis Matrix sub-menu and select another species
(row).

! Do not change the values from the factory default settings unless
advised to do so by AMETEK.
CAUTION

 CONFIGUV
AnalysisAnalysis Matrix
Row 1<species>

Figure 4-14.8.2.
Matrix Row 1 <species>
Configuration screen.

User Interface | 4-45


Viewing and Changing UV Optical Bench Modbus
Communications Parameters

Changing these parameters may render Modbus communication


 inoperative.
NOTE

For DCS Port Baud Rate, Parity, and Stop Bits:


To have the changes take effect, press to send the changes to the
analyzer, save the changes to nonvolatile memory, and then cycle the
analyzer power Off-On.

The UV Optical Bench Modbus Communication setup screen allows you


 Level2 password is
required to make changes
to view and set up Modbus parameters that enable the analyzer (operat-
ing as a slave device) to communicate with the Modbus master. To make
to the UV Bench Modbus
Communication screen. changes, select an option from the drop-down list, and then press to
change it to , which indicates the parameter is enabled. After changes
have been made, press to send the new values to the analyzer, or
press to refresh the parameters and cancel the changes.

For more information about changing the node address, refer to “Chang-
ing the Modbus Node Address” in this chapter and to Step 4 under “Pow-
ering Up the Analyzer” in Chapter 3.

 CONFIGUV Bench
Modbus

Figure 4-15.
UV Bench Modbus
Communication
Configuration screen.

4-46 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Modbus Node Address
Displays and allows you to change the node address assigned to the
analyzer for Modbus communications. Valid addresses are 1–254. The
default setting is 101.

! The HMI uses the same Modbus Node Address to communicate with
the analyzer. If the Node Address is changed, change the HMI system
CAUTION
setting to use the new Node Address.

DCS Port Baud Rate


Displays and allows you to change the Baud Rate at which data will
be transferred between the analyzer and the Distributed Control
System (DCS) using Modbus communications. The typical default is
38.4K. Other options include 19.2K, 9600, 4800.

DCS Port Parity


Displays and allows you to change the current Parity setting (none,
odd, even) used for Modbus communications between the analyzer
and the DCS. The typical default is none.

DCS Port Stop Bits


Displays and allows you to change the Stop Bits setting used for Mod-
bus communications between the analyzer and the DCS. The typical
default is ‘1’.

User Interface | 4-47


Viewing and Changing HMI Date\Time

The HMI Date\Time screen allows you to view and change the HMI date
 Level2 password is
required to make changes to
and time which is necessary for time-stamping the analyzer data log.
the HMI Date\Time screen.
The date and time must be changed to that of the installation location on
startup; otherwise, the date/time of the factory location will be in effect.


Time
CONFIGHMI Date\

Figure 4-16.
HMI Date\Time
Configuration screen.

 Daylight savings time (DST) change is not supported by this HMI;


you must manually change the time from DST to standard time.
NOTE

4-48 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Saving and Restoring Configuration Data

The Save\Restore Configuration screen allows you to save the current


analyzer configuration settings in nonvolatile (NV) memory. This screen
also allows you to restore previously saved analyzer configuration settings
from nonvolatile memory.

 The original factory settings are in a file called “9900_CFG Report.” A


copy of this file is located on the Documentation Package shipped with
NOTE
the analyzer.

 CONFIGSave\
Restore

Figure 4-17.1.
Save\Restore
Configuration screen.

User Interface | 4-49


Saving User Configuration Data

Use the SAVE to NV memory button to save the current analyzer configu-
ration settings in nonvolatile memory that can later be used to restore the
settings. When you press this button, the analyzer immediately begins
backing up its current configuration settings. The message “Saving...” ap-
pears on the screen until the file saving process is complete.

Figure 4-17.2.
Saving configuration
settings screen.

Restoring User Configuration Data

Use the RESTORE from NV memory button to restore the last-saved


analyzer configuration settings from nonvolatile memory (the settings
from the last time the SAVE to NV memory button was used to save the
configuration settings). The message “Restoring...” appears on the screen
until the file restoring process is complete.

Figure 4-17.3.
Restoring configuration
settings screen.

4-50 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


CALIBRATION

Calibrating the analyzer can be done directly from the Distributed Con-
trol System (DCS), Data Acquisition System (DAS), or Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC), or using a combination of DCS, DAS, or PLC and
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) settings. This chapter discusses how to
manually Zero- or Span-calibrate, and how to configure and enable the
Auto Zero function, from the analyzer HMI. This chapter also discusses
how to view the results of Zero and Span calibrations. Finally, this chapter
discusses how to calibrate the analog outputs.

This manual does not discuss how to enable the appropriate flow control
settings using the DCS, DAS, or PLC system, prior to performing the cali-
bration procedures.

Calibration | 5-1
Zero and Span Calibration
From the Calibration menu, you can access various screens to configure
Zero and Span calibration parameters, initiate Manual Zero and Span cali-
brations, set up and enable the optional Auto-Zero calibration, and view
the Zero and Span calibration results.

The Model 9900RM Analyzer can support Manual calibration (typical ap-
plications) and Auto-Zero calibrations (optional). For Manual calibrations,
the Zero or Span calibration gas must be introduced manually into the
Measuring Cell. For Auto-Zero calibrations, an optional solenoid is inte-
grated within the analyzer sample system, and the Auto-Zero function
can be configured to control the sole­noid, which will automatically intro-
duce Zero gas through the analyzer sample system and its Measuring Cell
according to predetermined settings.

 Zero- and Span-calibration results are automatically saved to non-


NOTE
volatile memory after the calibration is complete.

 Figure 5-1 is shown


with the optional Integrated
Auto-Zero function enabled
(Auto-CAL button displayed
on screen).

Figure 5-1.
Calibration menu.

CAL Averaging Duration (sec)


Displays the current setting of the Calibration Averaging Timer which
determines the length of time (seconds) the calibration will run after
it has been started. The calibration averaging time can be changed to
increase or decrease the time of the actual calibration (averaging time).
To do this, tap the “seconds” (sec) field to display a numeric keypad.
Enter the new value (range: 0–65535 seconds) and press the ENT key,
then press (flashing) to send the change to the analyzer.

The CAL Averaging Duration (along with the Zero Gas Flushing
timer) is part of the overall Countdown timer seen on the calibration
screens.

5-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Manually Zero-Calibrate the Analyzer and Optional O2
Sensor, and View the Results

 Using the DCS, DAS, or PLC system, ensure the sample gas flow
control is set to Zero flow, and that the appropriate zero gas has been
NOTE
introduced into the analyzer sample system.

To initialize a Manual Zero and view its results:

1. Disconnect the Sample Gas line from the Sample Gas Inlet port on the
back of the analyzer and connect the Zero gas tube to the Inlet port
(see Figure 5-4).

Adjust the Zero Gas regulator to <5 psig @ 2.0 scfh.

2. From the Manual Zero-Calibration screen, enable the ZERO-CAL


option (e.g., UV or O2) you wish to Zero calibrate by pressing the
button. The button will change to to indicate that option is en-
abled to be zeroed.

If an O2 Sensor is installed, O2 will also be displayed.

To Zero both the UV and O2 simultaneously, enable both options.

 If both the UV and O2 Sensor are zero-calibrated at the same time, an


oxygen-free Zero gas must be used.
NOTE


CAL
CALManual Zero-

Figure 5-2.1.
Manual Zero-
Calibration screen.

Calibration | 5-3
3. When the live concentration values that are displayed are stable and
near zero, press to start the Zero-Calibration. The Countdown
timer will begin to count down from the value of its setting. The Zero-
Calibration is automatically adjusted based on the average reading dur-
ing the CAL Averaging Duration timer period. The adjustment applies
to the option(s) selected.

To abort the calibration sequence while it is in progress, press .

4. After the Zero-Calibration is complete you can view the results. Press
to return to the Calibration menu and then press the ZERO-CAL
Results button to view the ZERO-CAL RESULTS screen. This screen
displays the results for the Zero-Calibration. This screen displays the
Zero Transmittance results for each filter and the results of the species
being measured by the optional, installed sensor (e.g., O2 sensor).

 CALZero-CAL
Results

Figure 5-2.2.
Manual Zero-Calibration
Results screen.

Zero Transmittance
Displays the recorded PMT signal transmittance value for each
lamp/filter combination, with Zero Gas in the sample system. It is
adjusted automatically whenever the analyzer is zero-calibrated.
Record this value after the Zero for long-term diagnostic purposes.

O2 Signal Zero Offset


The O2 sensor signal zero offset value, which is adjusted auto-
matically based on the average reading whenever the O2 sensor is
zeroed. Record this value after the Zero for long-term diagnostic
purposes.

5-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Zero-CAL Offsets
Press this button to view the ZERO-CAL OFFSETS screen, which
displays two columns of offsets that correspond with the Present
(current) and Previous (last) Zero offsets. The Zero-CAL Time
displays the Date and Time when the last Manual Zero-Calibration
was performed and the Present Zero offsets were determined.

 CALZero-CAL
ResultsZero-CAL Offsets

Figure 5-2.3.
Manual Zero-Calibration
Offsets screen.

5. Bleed down the Zero gas and disconnect it from the analyzer.

Reconnect and tighten the Sample Gas line to the Sample Gas Inlet
port on the back of the analyzer.

Calibration | 5-5
Span-Calibrate the Analyzer and View the Results
Using the DCS, DAS, or PLC system, ensure the sample gas flow
 control is set to Span Flow, and that the appropriate Span gas has
NOTE
been introduced into the analyzer sample system.

Each species measured by the analyzer and each species measured by a


sensor must be spanned individually.

To initialize a Span-Calibration and view its results:

1. Disconnect the Sample Gas line from the Sample Gas Inlet port on the
back of the analyzer and connect the Span gas tube to the Inlet port
(see Figure 5-4).

Adjust the Span Gas regulator to <5 psig @ 2.0 scfh.

2. From the Manual Span-Calibration screen, enable the species you


wish to Span calibrate by pressing the button. The button will
change to to indicate that option is enabled to be spanned. (Only
one species can be spanned at a time.)

If an O2 sensor is being used, O2 will also be displayed.


CAL
CALManual Span-

Figure 5-3.1.
Manual Span-
Calibration screen.

3. In the field for the species that will be spanned, enter the Span Gas
Value and then press the ENT button. Press to send the new Span
Gas Value to the Bench.

Allow Span gas to flow and adjust the Span gas flow rate.

5-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


4. When the live concentration value that is displayed is stable and near
calibration gas value, press to start the Span-Calibration. The
Countdown timer will begin to count down from the value of its setting.
The analyzer Span-Calibration is automatically adjusted based on the
average reading during the CAL Averaging Duration timer period. The
adjustment applies to the species selected.

To abort the calibration sequence while it is in progress, press .

5. After the Span-Calibration is complete you can view the results. Press
to return to the Calibration menu and then press the Span-CAL
Results button to view the SPAN-CAL RESULTS screen. This screen
displays the Span Factor results of each UV species and the results of
the species being measured by the optional, installed sensor (e.g., O2
sensor).

! The Span Factor is automatically determined by the analyzer at the


end of a Span calibration.
CAUTION

AMETEK does not recommend manually altering the Span Factor


unless directed by a qualified service technician.

 CALSpan-CAL
Results

Figure 5-3.2.
Manual Span-Calibration
Results screen.

Present / Previous Span Factors


Displays two columns, the Present (current) and Previous (last)
Span (calibration) Factors for the calculated result (com­ponent
concentration), for each species. The typical default Span Factor is
1.0 and should not go outside ≤ 0.85 or ≥ 1.15.

Calibration | 5-7
Span-CAL Offsets
Press this button to view the SPAN-CAL OFFSETS screen, which
displays the Span-Calibration offset of each species. This is the
difference between the measured concentration and the calibration
concentration, before the corresponding Span Factor is adjusted at
the end of a Span-Calibration. The Span-CAL Time displays the
Date and Time at which the Span-Calibration was performed for
each species.

 CALSpan-CAL
ResultsSpan-CAL Offsets

Figure 5-3.3.
Manual Span-Calibration
Offsets screen.

6. Bleed down the Span gas and disconnect it from the analyzer.

Reconnect and tighten the Sample gas line to the Sample Gas Inlet
port on the back of the analyzer.

5-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure 5-4.
Rear Panel Layout,
Sample gas Inlet port.

Calibration | 5-9
Setting Up Auto-Zero Parameters and Viewing Live
Results – Optional

 This feature is optional, and is available only if the Integrated


Auto-Zero function is enabled.
NOTE

The analyzer can be configured to initiate an Auto-Zero, which automati-


cally introduces Zero gas into the sample system at specific times.

 Before initiating an Auto-Zero, ensure the Zero gas pressure has been
set to <5 PSIG @ 2 SCFH.
NOTE

To set up Auto-Zero parameters:


1. From the main Calibration menu (Figure 5-1), check the CAL Averag-
ing Duration setting. If required, change it to lengthen or shorten the
time of the actual Zero (averaging time). To do this, tap the CAL Aver-
aging Duration numeric field (main Calibration menu), enter a new
value, and tap ENT to save the change. The CAL Averaging Duration
is part of the overall Countdown timer seen on the Auto-Zero screen
(Figure 5-5.3).
2. Press the Auto-CAL button to view the Auto-Zero options on the
AUTO-CAL sub-menu. From this screen, you can determine the
status of the Auto-Zero function and Zero Control Solenoid, configure
Auto-Zero parameters, initiate an Auto-Zero, and view the results of
the Auto-Zero.

 CALAuto-CAL

Figure 5-5.1.
Auto-Calibration sub-
menu, Auto-Zero idle.

5-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


The status of the Auto-Zero function and Zero Control Solenoid can
be determined from this screen:

Auto Zero is idle and the Zero Solenoid Control is under automatic
analyzer control:
In this state, the Auto Zero, Auto Zero Setup, and Auto Zero
Results buttons are not greyed out (white text), and the Zero
Solenoid Control Auto button is GREEN. Under these conditions,
the Auto-Zero can be started manually by pressing this button.
The ZSolCtrl status indicator on the HOME screen will also be on
(GREEN).

Auto Zero is in progress:


In this state, the Auto Zero Setup button is greyed out (grey
text), and the Zero Solenoid Control Auto button is GREEN. The
ZSolCtrl status indicator on the HOME screen will also be on
(GREEN).

Zero Solenoid Control is forced to OFF (de-energized):


In this state, the Auto Zero, Auto Zero Setup, and Auto Zero Re-
sults buttons are not greyed out (white text), and the Zero Sole-
noid Control OFF button is Orange.

Zero Solenoid Control is forced to ON (energized):


In this state, the Auto Zero, Auto Zero Setup, and Auto Zero Re-
sults buttons are not greyed out (white text), and the Zero Sole-
noid Control ON button is Red.

 CALAuto-CALAuto
Zero Setup

Figure 5-5.2.
Auto-Zero Setup
screen.

Calibration | 5-11
3. To set up the Auto-Zero parameters, press the Auto Zero Setup button
to view the AUTO ZERO SETUP screen.

The AUTO ZERO SETUP screen displays the following:

First Auto Zero at


The clock time of the first Auto-Zero to be performed. The ana-
lyzer will run an Auto-Zero at the time entered and then at equal
intervals – based on the Auto Zero Interval value entered – over
a 24-hour period. The next scheduled clock time for an Auto-Zero
to be performed is displayed to the right of the First Auto Zero at
numeric field (example, [18:00]).

Auto Zero Interval (hrs)


The interval hours for which the system will perform an Auto-Ze-
ro each day. The analyzer will run an Auto-Zero at equal intervals
based on this value over a 24-hour period. The number of times
per day the Auto-Zero will be performed is displayed to the right
of the Auto Zero Interval numeric field (example, [3/day]).

If the interval entered is not divisible into 24, the interval is round-
ed up to the nearest interval divisible into 24. For example, ‘5’ will
be rounded up to ‘6’, ‘7’ to ‘8’, ‘10’ to ‘12’.

Zero Gas Flushing (sec)


The duration of which the Zero gas will flush the analyzer sample
system and its Measuring Cell during the Auto-Zero, before signal
averaging is performed. The range is 60–600 seconds.

This value is also used as the duration of which the system will
flow Sample gas, as part of the Auto-Zero sequence, prior to the
analyzer resuming normal sampling and operation.

The Zero Gas Flushing timer (along with the CAL Averaging
Duration timer) is part of the overall Countdown timer seen on the
calibration screens.

This parameter is used for the Auto-Zero sequence and for manu-
al Auto-Zeroes.

O2-CAL included check box


Enable this check box to Zero the O2 Sensor in the same sequence
as the UV Zero. The Zero gas must be Nitrogen to Zero the O2
Sensor. ( = enabled.)

CAL-Verification only check box


Enable this check box if you do not want the analyzer to perform
an adjustment at the scheduled time. That is, you just want the
analyzer to switch on/off the Zero solenoid as scheduled, and use
your own system to check, adjust, and record the analyzer Zero.
( = enabled.)

5-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


To configure the Auto-Zero parameters:

a. Tap the First Auto Zero at hour numeric field to display a numeric
keypad, enter the hour value, and tap the ENT key to save the
change. Repeat this for the minute numeric field. The hour and
minute must be entered separately.

b. Tap the Auto Zero Interval numeric field to display a numeric


keypad. Enter the interval hours in which the system will perform
an Auto-Zero each day. Tap the ENT key to save the change.

c. Tap the Zero Gas Flushing numeric field display a numeric key-
pad. Enter the number of seconds (minimum 60) the system will
flush Zero gas through the sample system before signal averaging
is performed. Tap the ENT key to save the change.

d. If your system uses an optional O2 Sensor and you wish to Zero


the O2 Sensor in the same sequence as the UV Zero, enable the
O2-CAL included check box. The Zero gas must be Nitrogen to
Zero the O2 Sensor.

e. If you do not want the analyzer to perform an adjustment at the


scheduled time, enable the CAL-Verification only check box.

f. If not already done, adjust the CAL Averaging Duration on the


main Calibration menu.

g, After setting up the Auto-Zero parameters, press (flashing) to


send the changes to the analyzer. The analyzer will perform the
Auto-Zero according to the Auto-Zero parameters settings.

Calibration | 5-13
4. If required, a manual Auto Zero can be performed. From the AUTO-
CAL sub-menu, ensure the conditions are met to allow a manual Auto-
Zero to be started, and press the Auto Zero button to view the Auto-
Zero screen. From this screen, press the button to manually initiate
an Auto-Zero.


Zero
CALAuto-CALAuto

Scheduled clock time


of next Auto-Zero

Figure 5-5.3.
Auto-Zero screen.
Auto Zero Progress Indicator Lamp

If a Zero is already in progress, the and buttons will not be


displayed; therefore, a manual Auto-Zero cannot be started.

Whether an Auto-Zero is started manually or automatically, the live


concentration values and other Auto-Zero information can be viewed
from this screen.

Species results
Live results (in ppm) are displayed in the left portion of this
screen, including O2 results if an optional O2 Sensor has been
installed.
Current Time
Current analyzer clock time.

Time To Next
Amount of time until the next Auto-Zero will begin.

Next Auto-Zero
Scheduled clock time of the next Auto-Zero.

5-14 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Countdown timer
Displays the aggregate time of the CAL Averaging Duration timer
and Zero Gas Flushing timer. This setting is also used as the timer
which allows Sample gas to flow back into the analyzer sample
system after an Auto-Zero.

For example, the Zero Gas Flushing timer is set at “60” seconds
and the CAL Averaging Duration timer is set at “45” seconds. The
Auto-Zero sequence will be:

a. The Zero solenoid will switch to allow Zero gas to flush


through the analyzer sample system for 60 seconds (Zero Gas
Flushing timer setting = 60).

b. The actual Zero (or averaging) will occur for 45 seconds (CAL
Averaging Duration timer setting = 45).

c. The Zero solenoid will switch again to allow Sample gas to


flush through the analyzer sample system for 60 seconds (du-
ration is the same as the Zero Gas Flushing timer setting).

The total Auto-Zero duration is 165 seconds (60+45+60).

GO and X buttons
Press the button to manually initiate an Auto-Zero. When an
Auto-Zero is in progress, either manually initiated or scheduled
(auto), the button can be used to abort the Auto-Zero. If these
buttons are not displayed, it indicates an Auto-Zero cannot be ini-
tiated manually because the Zero solenoid is not under Automatic
analyzer control or an Auto-Zero is already in progress.

Auto Zero Progress Indicator Lamp


The rectangular lamp at the bottom of the screen – to the left of the
button – works in conjunction with the Countdown timer. This
lamp displays a different colour to indicate the stage of the Auto-
Zero sequence that is in progress:

Dark – No Auto-Zero is in progress.

Red – Auto-Zero is in progress and the Zero solenoid is energized,


allowing Zero gas to flush the Measuring Cell. This stage is
dependant on the Zero Gas Flushing and CAL Averaging
Duration timer settings.

Blue – Auto-Zero is in progress and the Zero solenoid is de-ener-


gized, allowing sample gas to return to the Measuring Cell.
This stage is dependant on the Zero Gas Flushing timer set-
ting.

Calibration | 5-15
Viewing the Auto Zero Offset (Drift) Results
After the Auto-Zero is complete, you can view the Zero Offset (Drift)
results. To view the Auto Zero Offset results, press the Auto Zero Results
button from the Auto-Calibration sub-menu to view the AUTO ZERO
RESULTS screen.

 CALAuto-CALAuto
Zero Results

Figure 5-5.4.
Auto Zero Results
(offsets) screen.

The AUTO ZERO RESULTS screen displays the following:

Species offset results


The last Zero Offset (Drift) results (or results currently being adjusted)
are displayed in the middle portion of this screen.

Auto Zero Time


Displays the Date and Time of the last Auto-Zero.
The format is YY-MM-DD hh:mm.

5-16 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Calibrate the Analog Outputs
The ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION setup screen allows you to cali-
brate the analog outputs. Only one operation can be selected/performed
at a time.

 CONFIGCustomer
I/OAnalog Output
Calibration

Figure 5-6.
Analog Output
Calibration screen.

When entering input ranges, the values must be within the 0–20 mA
 and 0–5 V ranges for the respective current and voltage outputs.
NOTE

To calibrate the analog outputs:

1. From the Operation group, press the zero-CAL button to change


it to , which indicates the option is enabled. Press to send the
selected operation to the analyzer.

Use a volt meter to measure the analog output of each channel.

In the mV Reading zero numeric fields, enter the “zero” mV values


measured for the corresponding channels and then press to send
the values to the analyzer.

2. Enable ( ) the span-CAL operation and then press to send the


selected operation to the analyzer.

Use a volt meter to measure the analog output of each channel.

In the mV Reading span numeric fields, enter the “span” mV values


measured for the corresponding channels and then press to send
the values to the analyzer.

Calibration | 5-17
3. Enable ( ) the 25%-span check operation and then press to
send the selected operation to the analyzer.

Use a volt meter to measure the voltage of each analog output channel
to verify that it is measuring 25 % of full-scale (e.g., for a 1–5 V output
it is measured to be 2 V).

4. Enable ( ) the 50%-span check operation and then press to


send the selected operation to the analyzer.

Use a volt meter to measure the voltage of each analog output channel
to verify that it is measuring 50 % of full-scale (e.g., for a 1–5 V output
it is measured to be 3 V).

5. Enable ( ) the 75%-span check operation and then press to


send the selected operation to the analyzer.

Use a volt meter to measure the voltage of each analog output channel
to verify that it is measuring 75 % of full-scale (e.g., for a 1–5 V output
it is measured to be 4 V).

6. Enable ( ) normal operation and then press to return the ana-


log output back to normal operation.

 After this calibration is complete, return to the Configuration screen


to save the calibration values to NV memory.
NOTE

5-18 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


MAINTENANCE and TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter discusses preventive maintenance to keep the analyzer


system operating at peak efficiency, how to check for plugging in the
analyzer’s sample system, and how to replace internal parts. This chapter
also discusses how to view status conditions to diagnose and troubleshoot
problems with the analyzer.

Safety Considerations
Before performing any maintenance, service, or troubleshooting on the
 analyzer, review and follow all safety information under “Personnel
NOTE
and Equipment Safety Information” following the Table of Contents
near the beginning of this manual. This information describes proce-
dures to follow to avoid personal injury and/or damage to the equip-
ment. All regulatory agency and personnel safety procedures for
your jurisdiction must be followed.

Personnel should be thoroughly familiar with the operation of the


analyzer before performing the maintenance and troubleshooting
procedures described in this section.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-1


Maintenance
Generally, the Model 9900 Analyzer requires limited maintenance. The
Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule lists general maintenance to
follow to ensure continued and proper operation of the analyzer. This
section also describes parts that require replacement and the frequency in
which they should be replaced.

Preventive Maintenance
To reduce the occurrence of problems with the analyzer, AMETEK recom-
mends that you follow the Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule.
Since most analyzer problems originate within the sample system, the
primary objective of this schedule is proper care of the sample system.

! Preventing leaks in the sample system is critical to proper analyzer


operation. The analyzer’s sample system must be leak checked when-
CAUTION
ever it has been dismantled for maintenance or repair.

The “Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule” suggests actions and


their frequency when caring for the analyzer. Detailed information and
assembly drawings that are intended to assist you when changing out
parts can be found in appropriate sections in this chapter and/or in the
“Supplemental Information” folder of the analyzer Documentation Package.

Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Frequency Task
Daily Check for Fault or Warning Status Conditions
The DIAG button on the HOME screen is the first indication from the
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) that there are active status condi-
tions. If status conditions are triggered, this button begins flashing and


Status
DIAGUV Bench
changes color (ORANGE=Warning status; RED=FAULT status). If so,
view the UV Bench Status diagnostic screen.
From other screens, the button (with ORANGE or RED indicator)
also serves to indicate there are active status conditions.
Review “Troubleshooting and Diagnostics” in this chapter for information
about the status conditions and the suggested corrective actions to take
to clear the conditions.

6-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Frequency Task
Monthly Check Analyzer Response Time
Manually zero the analyzer and then observe the sample response time.
View the HOME screen on the HMI and observe the output concentra-
tion. Record the time it takes the analyzer to display the first concentra-
tion reading.
Observe the species on the HOME screen and record the time it takes the
species concentration(s) to begin ramping up from the near-zero levels to
the stream concentration levels. Typically, a good response time is less
than 30 seconds, depending on the sample system length and the volume
that needs to be displaced with the sample gas. A change in the response
time, over time, may suggest plugging problems in the sample system.
Every 6 Months Sample and Vent Lines
Inspect the Sample Line and Vent Line (if used) for sags, sharp bends,
or damage to the outer skin. If necessary, take appropriate safety pre-
cautions and replace the lines. Perform a leak check on all associated
fittings after replacing any line(s).
9–12 Months Source Lamps
Replace the source lamps. One or both of the source lamps may need
to be replaced sooner if information from the analyzer’s diagnostics

Status
DIAGUV Bench
indicates related status conditions (i.e., “ALC low error” or “ALC high
error” are active on the UV Bench Status diagnostic screen). Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” later in this chapter.
Every Year Measuring Cell
Clean the Measuring Cell. This annual schedule is a minimum require-
ment. If other conditions are found to be present, as outlined under the
section titled “Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance” in this chapter,
cleaning may be required more frequently.
At the same time, replace the o-rings and check the condition of the
Windows (replace if damaged).
Every Year USB Flash Drive
The USB Flash Drive supplied by AMETEK is 1 GB, which can store
approximately 2.5 years of continuously logged data. However, to avoid
problems with logging data to the USB Flash Drive, AMETEK recommends
saving the logged data to a PC annually (such as during regular
maintenance) and then deleting the contents of the USB Flash Drive.
Every 2 Years Filter Assembly, Optical Bench
(Multi-Species/Motorized Filter Wheel analyzers only)
Replace the Filter Wheel Drive Belt and the Filter Wheel Bearings.
If there are recurring status conditions that suggest problems with the
Filter Wheel or other related parts in the Filter Assembly, replace these
parts sooner. Refer to “Filter Wheel Maintenance – Motorized Optical
Bench Analyzers,” later in this chapter.
Other Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Clean the graphic panel on the HMI regularly to avoid dust build-up.
When cleaning the graphic panel, power to the HMI (analyzer) must
be OFF. Using a damp cloth to avoid electrostatic discharge, wipe the
graphic display panel.
Other Change Fuses
Replacing a fuse is only required in the event that a fuse has blown or
been damaged. See listings under “Spare Analyzer Fuses” in Chapter 7
and the AC Power Distribution/MOV Board (100-2450) in Appendix C for
fuse locations. Substitution of specified replacement components
(fuses) is not permitted. Disconnect power supply before replacing
the fuses on the AC Power Distribution/MOV board.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-3


Before Performing Maintenance

! The analyzer sample system will be under positive pressure.


WARNING
Under normal operating conditions, lethal concentrations of H2S and
other toxic gases may be present within the analyzer’s sample system.
Take all necessary safety precautions to purge the sample system and
to ensure safe handling of the Cell. If necessary, a breathing appa-
ratus must be worn while servicing the sample system.

Before working on the sample system, manually zero the sample system,
isolate it (blocked it in) from the sample stream, and disconnect analyz-
er power. This procedure is necessary prior to changing out any ana-
lyzer components or replacing any replaceable parts (as part of regular
preventive maintenance), or when performing leaks checks following the
replacement of the Zero Gas supply or other adjustments to any of the
connection points in the analyzer’s sample system.

The sample system is defined as all components in the analyzer sys-


tem through which sample gas passes.

Detecting a Plug in the Sample System

Detecting a plug is best done by observing the analyzer’s measurement


response time immediately after Zeroing the analyzer. A typical response
is less than 30 seconds. Observe your analyzer and learn what a normal
response time is. Use the recorded response time as a reference for detect-
ing the formation of plugs in the sample system over time.

If the sample response time is longer than normal, it is most likely due to
plugging somewhere in the sample system. The portion of the sample sys-
tem with the highest risk of plugging is the sample inlet and the section
of the sample inlet most prone to plugging is at the sample gas extraction
point. One way to confirm that a plug is in the sample inlet is to close the
Vent Valve’s isolation valve and Zero the analyzer.

If your application disperses the used sample gas to atmosphere via a


 stack or low pressure flare header, disconnect the Vent Line and tem-
NOTE
porarily install an NPT plug.

6-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Observe the Cell Pressure (CellP) reading (HOME screen) and if the
reading approaches the Zero Gas supply pressure, a plug is present some-
where in the sample inlet.

! To avoid damaging the pressure transducer, do not set the pressure


higher than its maximum rating.
CAUTION

 After confirming that the plug is somewhere in the sample inlet, take
all appropriate safety precautions and dismantle the sample system,
NOTE
starting at the sample gas extraction point.

Plugs in the sample outlet (or vent side) of the sample system are rare.
Plugs in the vent system cause the aspirator drive air to flow back into the
Measuring Cell and, essentially, simulate a Zero Gas Flow or Zero condi-
tion.

Locating a Plug in the Sample System

If analyzer problems occur, they are most likely related to improper


sample system operation, such as plugs or leaks. Plugs in the sample sys-
tem cause problems in analyzer response time, either to changing sample
stream conditions or to Zero Gas. Leaks are potentially dangerous and
will eventually lead to corrosion problems.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-5


Changing Out Replaceable Parts
This section discusses the parts that should be changed out, according to
the “Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule.” These procedures focus
on the AMETEK supplied sample system.

! Preventing leaks in the sample system is critical to ensure proper


analyzer operation. If sample gas migrates into the Optical Bench
CAUTION
Assembly or Reflector Block section of the Cell due to a leak in the
Measuring Cell Assembly, the optics will become damaged and will
require replacement. Most leaks are preventable with regular cleaning
and replacement of the Measuring Cell o-rings.

Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance

The o-rings in the Measuring Cell should be replaced every year to avoid
a leak in the sample system. If the sample system operates above atmo-
spheric pressure, sample gas can leak from the Measuring Cell.

While the Measuring Cell is disassembled, clean its chambers and parts.
Refer to Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 for assistance in locating and identifying
the hardware components.

Clean the Measuring Cell and its Windows:

• If the analyzer responds slowly to zero when the sample system is free
of restrictions, or

• If evidence of contamination is present in the Sample Line and/or Vent


Line, or

• Every year as indicated in the “Analyzer Preventive Maintenance


Schedule.”

Replace the o-rings in the Measuring Cell:

• If, during an unscheduled cleaning (see cleaning requirements above),


the parts are found to be damaged. For example, the Measuring Cell
Windows are scratched, cracked, or chipped, or the o-rings are dam-
aged.

• Every year as indicated in the “Analyzer Preventive Maintenance


Schedule.”

6-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure 6-1.
Analyzer internal component
layout, all options.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-7


Figure 6-2.
40 cm Measuring Cell
(100-1270) maintenance
diagram.

6-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


 This procedure and the Figures referenced are based on a standard
Measuring Cell, as illustrated in Figure 6-2 and described in the fol-
NOTE
lowing pages. Depending on the application, a different Measuring
Cell may be used.

If your system uses a White Cell (low concentration applications) or


other non-typical Cell, refer to the corresponding Manual Supplement
shipped with the analyzer for spare parts, and for specific information
on cleaning and replacing parts in the Cell.

To clean the Measuring Cell and replace its o-rings:

1. Manually Zero the analyzer for 2–3 minutes.

2. After the Zero is complete, close the isolation valve on the Sample
Probe and the Vent Valve (or cap the Sample and Vent Lines) to isolate
the analyzer from the sample stream.

3. Power down the analyzer.

General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the Off
position.

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the Off position.

! Wait 5 minutes to allow the high-voltage capacitors in the source-


lamp power supply to discharge.
WARNING

4. Remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover and remove the Optical Bench/
Measuring Cell Assembly from the analyzer. To do this (see connector
“Item” locators in Figure 6-3):

a. Disconnect the cable connector (Cable 6) from J501 (Item 1) on the


Bench Controller board (connects to Com1 – D-sub 9-pin connec-
tor – on the HMI unit).

Disconnect the AC power connector from the lower connector


on J604 (Item 2) on the Bench Controller board (connects to AC
Power Distribution/MOV board).

Disconnect the ribbon cable connector (Cable 2) from J602 (Item 8)


on the Bench Controller board (connects to J1 on the Customer
I/O board).

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-9


Disconnect the 24 VDC power connector from J101 (Item 3) on the
Bench Controller board (connects to Power Supply).

Disconnect the terminals of the green/yellow Bench Ground wires


(near the Cell) that run from the Beamsplitter Block (on the Opti-
cal Bench) to the Ground board.

If the analyzer has the optional O2 Sensor, disconnect its ribbon


cable connector (Cable 1) from J307 (Item 4) on the Bench Control-
ler board.

If the analyzer has the optional Flow Sensor, disconnect its cable
connector (Cable 5) from J306 (Item 5) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Cell Temperature Sensor, discon-


nect its cable connector from J605 (Item 6) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Pressure Transducer, disconnect its


cable connector from J601 (Item 7) on the Bench Controller board.

If the analyzer has the optional 5 VDC Fan (Model 9900 Wall Mount
Analyzer only), disconnect its cable connector from J607 (Item 9)
on the Bench Controller board.

Before proceeding with the next steps, note the position of the sample
 tube fitting elbows. This will be helpful when replacing these parts
NOTE
later.

Various lengths of screws are encountered during disassembly. Take


note of where each length is used and be sure to replace the appropri-
ate screws in their original locations when reassembling the Measur-
ing Cell later.

6-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


b. Disconnect the Sample and Vent Line connection fittings from the
Cell.

 Depending on the optional sensors installed on your analyzer, the


tubing connections to the Measuring Cell may be from a union tee.
NOTE

1
5

4 8

2
3

LEGEND (CONNECTOR “ITEM” LOCATORS)


1. J501, to COM1 on HMI 6. J605, to optional Cell Temperature Sensor
2. J604, to AC Power Distribution/MOV board 7. J601, to optional Pressure Transducer
3. J101, to 24 VDC Power Supply 8. J602, to Customer I/O board
4. J307, to optional O2 Sensor 9. J607, to optional 5 VDC Fan (Model
9900WM Analyzer only)
5. J306, to optional Flow Sensor

Figure 6-3.
Cable connection points, Bench
Controller board, Optical Bench
removal/installation.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-11


c. Remove the (2) screws from the blue (Measuring) Cell Clamp and
remove the top part of the clamp. The Cell Temperature Sensor (if
installed) can remain in the Cell Clamp, and does not have to be
disconnected.

Loosen and back out – but do not remove – the (2) outer screws
on the blue Optical Bench Mounting Bracket (near the front panel
of the analyzer) until they are loose enough to slide the Optical
Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly toward the back of the analyzer.

d. While holding the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly by


the Lamp Block and the Measuring Cell, carefully lift it from its
mounting brackets and remove it from the analyzer.

! Do Not lift the Optical Bench Assembly by the printed circuit board
or lamp assembly.
CAUTION

! If the analyzer uses the optional Cell Temperature Sensor, the Mea-
suring Cell will be hot. Allow it to cool to allow safe handling or use
WARNING
insulated gloves when removing the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell
Assembly.

5. Hold the assembly with the Measuring Cell end up and remove the
(3) screws that secure the Measuring Cell to the Optical Bench Assem-
bly. Remove the Cell from the Optical Bench Assembly and place it on
a soft, non-abrasive cloth. Take care to ensure the Cell Window does
not drop out when these parts are separated.

Carefully remove the Cell Window from the Measuring Cell by grasp-
ing it by its outer edge. Avoid touching the Window surfaces.

Inspect the Window for any chips, cracks, or scratches. Place the Win-
dow on the cloth – and set it aside in a safe location – to avoid damag-
ing it.

Use an o-ring removal tool to remove the o-ring from the Cell. Take
care not to scratch or damage the o-ring groove.

6. While holding the Measuring Cell vertically so that the Reflector Block
end is up, remove the three screws that secure it to the Measuring
Cell. Remove the Reflector Block and place it on the cloth. Take care
to ensure the Cell Window does not drop out when these parts are
separated.

Carefully remove the Cell Window from the Measuring Cell by grasp-
ing it by its outer edge. Avoid touching the Window surfaces.

Inspect the Window and set it aside.

6-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


7. Wash the Cell Windows with a non-abrasive agent (such as Isopropa-
nol). Rinse the Windows with distilled water of at least pharmaceutical
grade. Inspect the Windows for chips, cracks, or scratches.

8. If the Windows are suitable for re-use, use Kimwipes® EX-L or an


equivalent extra low-lint tissue to clean their front and back sides. A
high purity solvent, such as Isopropanol (99 %), may also be used.

! Replace chipped, cracked, or scratched Windows when reassembling


the Measuring Cell.
CAUTION

9. Inspect the interior of the Cell Body for foreign material. If necessary,
use a cotton swab to clean it. If a more thorough cleaning is required,
use only cleaning materials that are suitable for use with the sample
species and the Cell.

Clean the fittings using the same method as the Cell Body.

10. Allow all components to dry thoroughly before reassembling. Dry,


oil-free instrument air can be used to remove any remaining moisture
from the passages in the Cell Body and sample tube fittings.

11. Starting on the Reflector Block end of the Cell, insert (1) new o-ring
(Part No. 100-2009) in the Reflector Block and (1) in the Cell Body.
Place the Window (Part No. 300-0281, handle by its outer edges only)
in the Cell Body. Replace the Reflector Block on the Cell, with the
“peak line” of the Reflector Block at 90° to a line through the fittings.
Secure the parts together using the (3) screws. Tighten the screws
evenly.

12. Invert the Measuring Cell and insert (1) new o-ring (Part No. 100-2009)
in the Cell Body.

With the Measuring Cell held vertically, grasp the edge of the Window
and carefully place it in the o-ring groove in the Cell.

13. Align the two larger-diameter holes in the Measuring Cell with the
two larger-diameter holes in the Optical Bench Assembly. Ensure
that the Cell Window does not slide out of position when the Cell is
initially placed against the Optical Bench Assembly. Secure the Cell
to the Optical Bench assembly using the (3) screws removed earlier.
Tighten the screws evenly.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-13


14. Replace the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly. To do this:

! Do Not lift the Optical Bench Assembly by the printed circuit board
or lamp assembly.
CAUTION

a. While holding the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly by


the Lamp Block and the Measuring Cell, carefully lower it onto its
blue Optical Bench Mounting Brackets, ensuring the screws on the
bracket are aligned with the mounting bracket slots on the Optical
Bench.

Gently slide the assembly toward the front of the analyzer until
the mounting bracket screws are engaged in the smaller slots of
the Optical Bench Mounting Bracket. Ensure the Measuring Cell is
properly seated against the Cell Clamp.

b. Starting at the Optical Bench Mounting Bracket at the front of the


analyzer, tighten the (2) screws to secure the assembly in place.

Replace the top part of the blue Cell Clamp and fasten it with its
(2) screws.

c. Reconnect the Sample/Vent tubes to the Measuring Cell fittings (or


union tees).

d. Reconnect the cable connector from Com1 (Cable 6) on the HMI


unit to J501 (Item 1) on the Bench Controller board.

Reconnect the AC power connector from the AC Power Distribu-


tion/MOV board to the lower connector on J604 (Item 2) on the
Bench Controller board.

Reconnect ribbon cable connector (Cable 2) from the Customer I/O


board to J602 (Item 8) on the Bench Controller board.

Reconnect the 24 VDC power connector from the Power Supply to


J101 (Item 3) on the Bench Controller board.

Reconnect the terminals of the green/yellow Bench Ground wires


(near the Cell) that run from the Beamsplitter Block (on the Opti-
cal Bench) to the Ground board.

If the analyzer has the optional O2 Sensor, reconnect its ribbon


cable connector (Cable 1) to J307 (Item 4) on the Bench Controller
board.

6-14 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


If the analyzer has the optional Flow Sensor, reconnect its cable
connector (Cable 5) to J306 (Item 5) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Cell Temperature Sensor, reconnect


its cable connector to J605 (Item 6) on the Bench Controller board.

If the analyzer has the optional Pressure Transducer, reconnect its


cable connector to J601 (Item 7) on the Bench Controller board.

If the analyzer has the optional 5 VDC Fan (Model 9900 Wall Mount
Analyzer only), connect its cable connector to J607 (Item 9) on the
Bench Controller board.

15. Perform a leak check on the fittings to ensure there are no leaks in the
sample system. Refer to “Pressure Leak Check” in Chapter 3 for details
on performing a leak check.

After you are sure there are no leaks, return to this procedure and
continue with the remaining steps.

16. Replace the Analyzer Enclosure cover and secure it with its screws.

17. Power up the analyzer:

General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the On
position.

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the On position.

18. Manually Zero and Span the analyzer as described under “Manual
Zero and Span Calibration” in Chapter 5.

Return the analyzer to Sample mode.

19. Open the isolation valve on the Sample Probe and the Vent Valve to
allow the flow of sample gas through the sample system.

20. Adjust the flow rate to the normal operating flow rate.

The procedure is complete.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-15


Replacing the Source Lamps

The typical life span of the source lamps is approximately 9–12 months of
continuous operation. However, a source lamp can begin to exhibit signs
of degradation after 5–6 months.

When Do the Source Lamps Need to be Replaced?

Indications of Source Lamp failures are:


• Unstable lamp voltage (check voltage levels on the Lamp Operations
diagnostic screen). Compare these values to the values recorded when
the lamps were new.

 DIAGLamp Ops

Figure 6-4.
Lamp Operations
diagnostic screen.

• The “ALC high error” or “ALC low error” (Automatic Lamp Control)
status conditions are set and displayed on the Human-Machine Inter-
face (HMI).

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code2

Figure 6-5.
Status Code 2 (2 of 2)
screen.

6-16 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


About the Source Lamps

 In the event of natural degeneration, damage, or other failure of a


Source Lamp, AMETEK recommends changing out both Source
NOTE
Lamps to ensure optimal operation and to minimize additional service
and downtime.

• Lamp 1 is the one closest to the Measuring Cell.


• The cathode of each Lamp must be centred on the optical axis of the
Beamsplitter for optimal operation of the analyzer. The cathode and
the outer envelope of the Source Lamp are not necessarily concentric
or consistent from lamp to lamp.
• A new Lamp must be aligned (rotated) to ensure optimal operation of
the analyzer – this is described in the section “Source Lamp Replace-
ment” in the following pages.

! Certain applications require different source lamps; do not inter-


change the lamps from their original positions. Refer to “Optical
CAUTION
Bench/Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance Spare Parts” in Chap-
ter 7 for part numbers.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-17


Source Lamps Replacement

Refer to Figures 6-1 and 6-5 for assistance in locating and identifying the
hardware components encountered while replacing the source lamps.

To replace the Source Lamps:

1. Manually Zero the analyzer for 2–3 minutes.

2. After the Zero is complete, close the isolation valve on the Sample
Probe and the Vent Valve (or cap the Sample and Vent Lines) to isolate
the analyzer from the sample stream.

3. Power down the analyzer.

General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the Off
position.

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the Off position.

! Wait 5 minutes to allow the high-voltage capacitors in the source-


lamp power supply to discharge.
WARNING

4. Remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover.

5. Loosen the Lamp Retainer Clip screw on each lamp and move each
clip away from each Lamp Socket. Loosen the Lamp Clamping Screw.
Remove the Lamp Socket from each lamp being replaced.

6. Remove the faulty lamp by rotating and sliding it away from the
Lamp Block Assembly.

Repeat for the second lamp, if necessary.

! Do not rotate or pull on the base of the source lamp because this may
cause it to separate from the glass envelope. Grasp the glass envelope
CAUTION
when rotating or pulling the source lamp.

7. Install the new lamp(s). Make sure that the narrow end of each lamp is
pushed completely into the holder in the Lamp Block Assembly.

! When handling a source lamp, it is very important not to touch the


lamp window because residual oils from the fingers will absorb ultravio-
CAUTION
let light. The window is the flat surface at the end of the narrow glass
tube. The lamp assembly is fragile and should be handled with care.

6-18 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


8. Replace each Lamp Socket on its respective lamp.

Replace the Lamp Retainer Clips on the Lamp Sockets and tighten the
screws.

9. Lightly tighten the Lamp Clamping Screw to secure the lamps. Do not
over tighten; the spring should not be collapsed. The lamp must be
allowed to move so it can be adjusted later in this procedure.

Figure 6-6.
Lamp maintenance diagram,
motorized Filter Wheel (multi-species)
Optical Bench, 100-2421-1B.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-19


10. Power up the analyzer and allow it to stabilize for approximately
5 minutes before continuing.

General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the On
position.

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the On position.

11. Manually Zero the analyzer for 2–3 minutes and continue to flow Zero
gas until the end of this procedure.

 Figure 6-5 depicts a Motorized Optical Bench; the lamp replacement


procedure is the same for the Motorless Filter Optical Bench version
NOTE
(see drawing 100-2421-1H in Appendix C).

12. Initiate an Auto Setup:

The Auto Setup function optimizes PMT (photomultiplier tube) high volt-
age control levels and the lamp current-pulse levels to maximize the PMT
signal strength for each valid and controlled wavelength. Always initiate
an Auto Setup after any lamps, optical filters, or PMTs have been installed
or replaced.

a. From the UV Bench Setup screen, press the Auto Setup button to
 The Level1 password is
required to make changes to
display the Auto Setup screen (Figure 6-6.2). Press to start the
the UV Bench Setup screen. Auto Setup. The filters used for this application will be displayed
on the Auto Setup screen. After the Auto Setup has progressed
through all eight Setup Steps (approximately three minutes), the
message “completed” is displayed to the right of the setup steps.

 The Auto Setup starts immediately upon pressing .


NOTE
When the Auto Setup is completed, the Automatic Lamp Control
(ALC) function is automatically turned on.

To stop the Auto Setup early, press .

6-20 | Model 9900RM Analyzer



Setup
CONFIGUV Bench

Figure 6-7.1.
UV Bench Setup
screen.

 CONFIGUV Bench
SetupAuto Setup

Figure 6-7.2.
Auto Setup screen.

b. After the Auto Setup is complete, view the Auto Setup Results
screen and check the PMT HV Msr and Ref supply voltage values
for both PMTs. Record these setpoints (which are adjusted during
the Auto Setup).

Also from the Auto Setup Result screen, check the Base and
Filterx (where ‘x’ = Filters 1 through 6) readings for the lamp\
filter combinations being used. Record these setpoints (which
are adjusted during the Auto Setup). Note and record the filter/
lamp combination with the highest mA value. This is the weakest
wavelength which will be used in the lamp alignment procedure.

 Filters that aren’t used for the specific lamp will display a value that
corresponds with the Base reading. For example, if the unused filters
NOTE
are Filters 2, 4, 6 , the displayed values for these filters will read
“0.250,” the same as the Base reading.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-21


13. Align and adjust the position of the lamps to maximize the Filter with
the weakest signal level. To do this:

 For single-species analyzers, only two filters will be displayed; for


multi-species analyzer, up to six filters will be displayed.
NOTE

If the lamp pulse current-control value for a filter location is at base


(or less), that filter location is not used.

a. View the Align Lamps screen and note the Filter with the weakest
signal level.

 CONFIGUV Bench
SetupAuto Setup Results

Figure 6-7.3.
Auto Setup Results
screen.

b. Turn off the ALC by tapping the switch to OFF.

 CONFIGUV Bench
SetupAlign Lamps

Figure 6-7.4.
Align Lamps screen
(Multi-Species Analyzers
shown).

6-22 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


c. Slowly rotate the new lamp until a position is found that maxi-
mizes the weakest signal (Maximum = 10.000). Since the HMI is
updated at 2-second intervals, use slow, small movements, paus-
ing each turn to view the new value.

For example, while observing the weakest signal, slowly rotate


Lamp 1 until its value has been maximized (value closest to
10.000).

 Because the Automatic Lamp Control (ALC enable function) is


turned Off when this screen is active, the displayed signal may not be
NOTE
perfectly steady.

d. Loosen the Locking Screw, located between the two source lamps.

While viewing the Align Lamp screen, further maximize the signal
by adjusting the Lamp (1 or 2) Adjusting Screw for the lamp that is
being aligned. Again, use slow, small movements, pausing each turn
to view the new value, which is updated at 2-second intervals.

Repeat this entire step for the second lamp, if replaced.

14. After the signal for both lamps has been maximized, retighten the
Locking Screw.

15. Tighten the Lamp Clamping Screw only enough to secure the lamps.
Do not over-tighten these screws; the springs should not be col-
lapsed.

16. Allow the analyzer to operate for 15 minutes and then initiate another
Auto Setup, which automatically turns on the ALC function. The Auto
Setup is complete after it has progressed through all eight steps and
the message “completed” is displayed on the Auto Setup screen.

From the Auto Setup Results screen (Figure 6-6.3) record the values
for each filter/lamp combination for long-term diagnostics.

17. Replace the Analyzer Enclosure cover and secure it with its screws.

18. Manually Zero and Span the analyzer as described under “Manual
Zero and Span Calibration” in Chapter 5.

19. Return the analyzer to Sample mode.

20. Open the isolation valve on the Sample Probe and the Vent Valve to
allow the flow of sample gas through the sample system.

21. Adjust the sample gas flow rate to the normal operating flow rate.

The procedure is complete.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-23


Filter Wheel Maintenance – Motorized Optical Bench Analyzers

When do the Filter Wheel Drive Belt and Bearings need to be replaced?

• Replace these parts every two years, as indicated in the “Analyzer Pre-
ventive Maintenance Schedule,” earlier in this chapter.

• If there are recurring status conditions that suggest problems with the
Filter Wheel or other related parts in the Filter Assembly, replace these
parts sooner.

Refer to Figures 6-1 and 6-8 for assistance in locating and identifying the
hardware components encountered while replacing the Drive Belt and
Bearings in the Optical Bench.

To replace the Drive Belt and Bearings:

1. Manually Zero the analyzer for 2–3 minutes.

2. After the Zero is complete, close the isolation valve on the Sample
Probe and the Vent Valve (or cap the Sample and Vent Lines) to isolate
the analyzer from the sample stream.

3. Power down the analyzer.

General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the Off
position.

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the Off position.

! Wait 5 minutes to allow the high-voltage capacitors in the source-


lamp power supply to discharge.
WARNING

4. Remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover and remove the Optical Bench/
Measuring Cell Assembly from the analyzer. To do this (see connector
“Item” locators in Figure 6-3):

a. Disconnect the cable connector (Cable 6) from J501 (Item 1) on the


Bench Controller board (connects to Com1 – D-sub 9-pin connec-
tor – on the HMI unit).

Disconnect the AC power connector from the lower connector


on J604 (Item 2) on the Bench Controller board (connects to AC
Power Distribution/MOV board).

6-24 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Disconnect the ribbon cable connector (Cable 2) from J602 (Item 8)
on the Bench Controller board (connects to J1 on the Customer
I/O board).

Disconnect the 24 VDC power connector from J101 (Item 3) on the


Bench Controller board (connects to Power Supply).

Disconnect the terminals of the green/yellow Bench Ground wires


(near the Cell) that run from the Beamsplitter Block (on the Opti-
cal Bench) to the Ground board.

If the analyzer has the optional O2 Sensor, disconnect its ribbon


cable connector (Cable 1) from J307 (Item 4) on the Bench Control-
ler board.

If the analyzer has the optional Flow Sensor, disconnect its cable
connector (Cable 5) from J306 (Item 5) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Cell Temperature Sensor, discon-


nect its cable connector from J605 (Item 6) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Pressure Transducer, disconnect its


cable connector from J601 (Item 7) on the Bench Controller board.

If the analyzer has the optional 5 VDC Fan (Model 9900 Wall Mount
Analyzer only), disconnect its cable connector from J607 (Item 9)
on the Bench Controller board.

Before proceeding with the next steps, note the position of the sample
 tube fitting elbows. This will be helpful when replacing these parts
NOTE
later.

Various lengths of screws are encountered during disassembly. Take


note of where each length is used and be sure to replace the appropri-
ate screws in their original locations when reassembling the Measur-
ing Cell later.

b. Disconnect the Sample and Vent Line connection fittings from the
Cell.

 Depending on the optional sensors installed on your analyzer, the


tubing connections to the Measuring Cell may be from a union tee.
NOTE

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-25


VIEW A: MOTOR CONNECTOR DETAIL

Figure 6-8.
Optical Bench Filter
Maintenance diagram, multi-
species (motorized Optical
Bench) analyzers, 100-2421-1A.

6-26 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


c. Remove the two screws from the blue (Measuring) Cell Clamp and
remove the top part of the clamp. The Cell Temperature Sensor (if
installed) can remain in the Cell Clamp, and does not have to be
disconnected.

Loosen and back out – but do not remove – the two outer screws
on the blue Optical Bench Mounting Bracket (near the front panel
of the analyzer) until they are loose enough to slide the Optical
Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly toward the back of the analyzer.

d. While holding the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly by


the Lamp Block and the Measuring Cell, carefully lift it from its
mounting brackets and remove it from the analyzer.

! Do Not lift the Optical Bench Assembly by the printed circuit board
or lamp assembly.
CAUTION

! If the analyzer uses the optional Cell Temperature Sensor, the Mea-
suring Cell will be hot. Allow it to cool to allow safe handling or use
WARNING
insulated gloves when removing the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell
Assembly.

5. Remove the four M4 x 25 screws that secure the Filter Wheel Cover to
the Filter Wheel Housing. Separate the two halves of the Filter Wheel
Assembly.

6. Remove the Filter Wheel Drive Belt by rolling it outward and away
from the groove of the Pulley.

7. To replace the Bearings:

a. Remove the M4 x 10 flat head screw that secures the Filter Wheel
in place on the Filter Wheel Shaft.

b. Remove the Retaining Washer, Wave Spring, Bushing, and Filter


Wheel from the Filter Wheel Shaft.

c. Remove the Bearings (2) from the Filter Wheel.

Obtain two new Bearings (Part No. 300-9437) and place one in
each side of the Filter Wheel.

d. Replace the Filter Wheel on the Filter Wheel Shaft followed by the
Bushing, Wave Spring, and Retaining Washer.

e. Replace the M4 x 10 flat head screw to secure the Filter Wheel to


the Filter Wheel Shaft.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-27


8. To replace the Filter Wheel Drive Belt, obtain a new belt (o-ring, Part
No. 301-1766) and place it over the Filter Wheel and then roll it over
the Pulley. Adjust the Pulley to properly seat the belt.

9. Align the two halves of the Filter Wheel Assembly and secure them
using the four M4 x 25 screws.

10. Replace the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly. To do this:

! Do Not lift the Optical Bench Assembly by the printed circuit board
or lamp assembly.
CAUTION

a. While holding the Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Assembly by


the Lamp Block and the Measuring Cell, carefully lower it onto its
blue Optical Bench Mounting Brackets, ensuring the screws on the
bracket are aligned with the mounting bracket slots on the Optical
Bench.

Gently slide the assembly toward the front of the analyzer until
the mounting bracket screws are engaged in the smaller slots of
the Optical Bench Mounting Bracket. Ensure the Measuring Cell is
properly seated against the Cell Clamp.

b. Starting at the Optical Bench Mounting Bracket at the front of the


analyzer, tighten the two screws to secure the assembly in place.

Replace the top part of the blue Cell Clamp and fasten it with its
two screws.

c. Reconnect the Sample/Vent tubes to the Measuring Cell fittings (or


union tees).

d. Reconnect the cable connector from Com1 (Cable 6) on the HMI


unit to J501 (Item 1) on the Bench Controller board.

Reconnect the AC power connector from the AC Power Distribu-


tion/MOV board to the lower connector on J604 (Item 2) on the
Bench Controller board.

Reconnect ribbon cable connector (Cable 2) from the Customer I/O


board to J602 (Item 8) on the Bench Controller board.

Reconnect the 24 VDC power connector from the Power Supply to


J101 (Item 3) on the Bench Controller board.

Reconnect the terminals of the green/yellow Bench Ground wires


(near the Cell) that run from the Beamsplitter Block (on the Opti-
cal Bench) to the Ground board.

6-28 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


If the analyzer has the optional O2 Sensor, reconnect its ribbon
cable connector (Cable 1) to J307 (Item 4) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Flow Sensor, reconnect its cable
connector (Cable 5) to J306 (Item 5) on the Bench Controller
board.

If the analyzer has the optional Cell Temperature Sensor, reconnect


its cable connector to J605 (Item 6) on the Bench Controller board.

If the analyzer has the optional Pressure Transducer, reconnect its


cable connector to J601 (Item 7) on the Bench Controller board.

If the analyzer has the optional 5 VDC Fan (Model 9900 Wall Mount
Analyzer only), connect its cable connector to J607 (Item 9) on the
Bench Controller board.

11. Perform a leak check on the fittings to ensure there are no leaks in the
sample system. Refer to “Pressure Leak Check” in Chapter 3 for details
on performing a leak check.

After you are sure there are no leaks, return to this procedure and
continue with the remaining steps.

12. Replace the Analyzer Enclosure cover and secure it with its screws.

13. Power up the analyzer :

General Purpose (GP) Analyzers:


Switch the AC Power Switch on the analyzer Rear Panel to the On
position. This will also apply power to the Human-Machine Interface
(HMI).

Division 2/Zone 2 Analyzers:


Switch the analyzer power-disconnect switch to the On position. This
will also apply power to the Human-Machine Interface (HMI).

14. Manually Zero and Span the analyzer as described under “Manual
Zero and Span Calibration” in Chapter 5.

Return the analyzer to Sample mode.

15. Open the isolation valve on the Sample Probe and the Vent Valve to
allow the flow of sample gas through the sample system.

16. Adjust the sample gas flow rate to the normal operating flow rate.

The procedure is complete.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-29


Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
The Model 9900RM Analyzer incorporates a built-in diagnostics function
that continuously monitors the operation of all analyzer operating pa-
rameters. Status code conditions generated by operating parameters that
exceed the factory-set parameter setpoints or generated by problems with
the electronics are detected by the analyzer and displayed on the HMI.

This section describes how the analyzer detects and displays Status code
conditions associated with its operation, what the conditions mean, and
action to take to clear the conditions.

Figure 6-9.
Diagnostic menu.

This section also discusses how to view diagnostic data from a variety of
analyzer diagnostic screens, and how to view current Status code condi-
tions from the HMI. Generally, most troubleshooting and diagnostics can
be done while working from the HMI.

6-30 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Diagnosing Problems With the Analyzer System
The diagnostic information can be viewed from the various Diagnostic
screens (Figure 6-9). Use these screens to view data about everything from
PMT Signals to UV Analysis Results, to Data Trending (graphing data), as
described in the following pages. To view diagnostic information, press
one of the BLUE buttons in the upper section of the screen. These individ-
ual screens are described in detail in the following pages. While viewing
any of the diagnostic screens, press to return to the main Diagnostic
menu or press to return to the home screen.

Customer I/O Board Status Relay and Contact Indicators:


Current States

The main Diagnostic menu also displays Customer Digital I/O indica-
tors that display the current state of up to five Status Relays and up to four
Contact Inputs on the Customer I/O board:

LED on
Relay Indicator State Customer I/O board
Status Relay 1 D1
Status Relay 2 White=Relay energized D6
Black=Relay de-energized
Status Relay 3 D7
Note: Relays 4,5 not available for
Status Relay 4 M9900RM Analyzers. D8
Status Relay 5 D9
Contact 1 White=Contact Closed D2
Contact 2 Black=Contact Open D3
Contact 3 Note: Contacts 3,4 not available for D4
M9900RM Analyzers.
Contact 4 D5
Note: The indicator lights on this screen correspond with the LEDs on the Customer I/O board. See
“Customer I/O Board” in Appendix C for more information.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-31


Types of Status Code Conditions

There are two types of status code conditions:

• Warning Status Conditions


Warning conditions are non-critical status conditions which, when
triggered, alert the operator to problems with the analyzer or sample
system conditions. These conditions indicate that the analyzer data
may be suspect. The analyzer requires attention. Investigate the cause
of the status code and take appropriate actions to correct the condi-
tions.

• Fault Status Conditions


Fault conditions are critical status conditions which, when triggered,
will prevent the analyzer from reporting valid data. These conditions
indicate that a fault has occurred and the analyzer is not operating
properly – the results are not valid. The analyzer requires service.
Investigate the cause of the status code and take appropriate actions to
correct the conditions.

Detecting Status Code Conditions

When status conditions are detected, you can view the conditions from
the UV Bench Status diagnostic screen. Methods to notify you of detected
Warning or Fault status conditions include:

• From the home screen, the DIAG button can alert you to status con-
ditions:
- If this button is WHITE, the status is normal; no Warning or Fault
conditions have been detected.
- If this button is ORANGE and flashing, a Warning condition has
been detected. The analyzer requires attention.
- If this button is RED and flashing, a Fault condition has been de-
tected. The analyzer requires service.

• While working from screens that have the (home) button, this
button can alert you to status conditions:

- If the button changes to ORANGE ( ) it indicates the ana-


lyzer is operating with one or more Warning conditions.

- If the button changes to RED ( ) it indicates the analyzer


is operating with one or more Fault conditions.

6-32 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing PMT Signals Diagnostic Information

The PMT Signals diagnostic screen displays the real-time value of the
Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) Measure (Msr) and Reference (Ref) voltage (V),
for each lamp\filter combination. Only values for the lamp\filter combina-
tions being used will be displayed.

 DIAGPMT Signals

Figure 6-10.
PMT Signals diagnostic
screen.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-33


Viewing Lamp Operations Diagnostic Information

The Lamp Operations diagnostic screen displays the real-time lamp Base
current (mA)/Base voltage (V) readings for Lamps 1 and 2 and the pulse
current (mA) and voltage (V) for each lamp\filter combination. The ALC
indicator light is also displayed here (GREEN indicates an Auto Lamp Con-
trol function has been enabled; OFF indicates the ALC is not enabled). Only
values for the lamp\filter combinations being used will be displayed.

 DIAGLamp Ops

Figure 6-11.
Lamp Operations
diagnostic screen.

6-34 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing PMT\Motor Operations Diagnostic Information

The PMT\Motor Operations diagnostic screen displays various Optical


Bench data.

 DIAGPMT\Motor Ops

Figure 6-12.
PMT\Motor Operations
diagnostic screen.

Measure-PMT HV
Displays the high voltage control of the Measure PMT (photomultiplier
tube). The unit is volts (V).

Reference-PMT HV
Displays the high voltage control of the Reference PMT (photomulti-
plier tube). The unit is volts (V).

Motor RPM
Displays the real-time reading of the number of Filter Wheel Motor
revolutions per minute (RPM). Note that the motor is geared to the
wheel at about an 8:1 ratio (i.e., the motor speed will be about eight
times the wheel speed). Nominal motor speed is 2600 RPM. (Multi-
Species or Multi-Range analyzers only.)

Filter Wheel RPM


Displays the real-time reading of the number of Filter Wheel revolu-
tions per minute (RPM). Nominal wheel speed is 325 RPM. (Multi-
Species or Multi-Range analyzers only.)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-35


Viewing Transmittance\Absorbance Diagnostic Information

The Transmittance\Absorbance diagnostic screen displays the real-time


transmittance (Trans.) and absorbance (Abs.) readings for each lamp\filter
combination. Only values for the lamp\filter combinations being used will
be displayed.

 DIAGTrans\Abs

Figure 6-13.
Transmittance\
Absorbance diagnostic
screen.

Trans.
Displays the normalized transmittance value, which is the ratio of the
Measure PMT signal to the Reference PMT signal normalized to the
zero-transmittance of the corresponding wavelength (lamp-filter com-
bination), displayed for each lamp\filter combination. It is an interme-
diate value used in the calculation of absorbance and concentration.

Abs.
Displays the absorbance for each lamp\filter combination.

6-36 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Viewing UV Analysis Results Diagnostic Information

The UV Analysis Results diagnostic screen displays the real-time (Live)


concentration result and the current Track-Hold (T-H) concentration re-
sult for each species being measured, including optional sensor data (e.g.,
O2). Note that the Live results displayed here is the same information that
is displayed on the home screen but with more digits after the decimal
point.

Each species is listed along with its current Track-Hold value. The Track-
Hold concentration result is the last measured concentration value for
each species that will be held constant during a Zero or Span calibra-
tion. For more information about Track-Hold settings, refer to the section
“Viewing and Changing Track-Hold Parameters” Chapter 4.

 DIAGUV Analysis
Results

Figure 6-14.
UV Analysis Results
diagnostic screen.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-37


Viewing Sensor Signals Diagnostic Information

The Sensor Signals diagnostic screen displays the real-time readings for
each operational sensor installed on the analyzer. Note that this is the
same information that is displayed on the home screen.

 DIAGSensor Signals

Figure 6-15.
Sensor Signals
diagnostic screen.

Bench Board Temp


Displays the real-time temperature measured by a sensor on the
Bench Controller board. This can be used as an indication of the tem-
perature (°C) inside the Analyzer Enclosure.

UV Bench Temp
Displays the real-time temperature (°C) of the Optical Bench, as mea-
sured by the Bench Temperature Sensor. The value to the right of the
temperature is the heater duty cycle (%).

Cell Temp
Displays the real-time temperature (°C) of the Measuring Cell, as
measured by the Cell Temperature Sensor. The value to the right of
the temperature is the heater duty cycle (%). (Optional Measuring Cell
Temperature Sensor must be installed.)

Cell Pres
Displays the real-time pressure (mmHg) of the sample gas in the Mea-
suring Cell. (Optional pressure transducer must be installed.)

6-38 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Flow Rate
Displays the real-time flow rate (litres per minute) being measured by
the (optional) Flow Sensor. (Optional Flow Sensor must be installed.)

O2 Conc
Displays the real-time concentration (%) being measured by the O2
Sensor. (Optional O2 Sensor must be installed.)

O2 Temp
Displays the real-time temperature (°C) being measured by the O2
Sensor. (Optional O2 Sensor must be installed.)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-39


Viewing System Diagnostic Information

The System Information diagnostic screen displays basic information


about the analyzer’s Optical Bench. This information can be useful when
troubleshooting problems with the analyzer.

 DIAGSystem Info

Figure 6-16.1.
System Information
diagnostic screen.

Serial Number
This is the serial number of the Optical Bench installed on this ana-
lyzer, or of the analyzer itself.
Firmware Version
This is the firmware version of the Bench Controller board installed
on this analyzer.
Hardware Presence
This is optional hardware installed on this analyzer. Press to view
the Hardware Installed pop-up window.
If a box is GREEN, the corresponding hardware is installed on the
analyzer.
If a box is BLACK, the hardware is not installed.

Press again to hide the pop-up window.

Figure 6-16.2.
Hardware Installed
pop-up window.

6-40 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Bench Type
This is the type of Optical Bench installed on this analyzer, either mo-
torized (motorized filter wheel, used when measuring multiple species
or multi-ranges simultaneously) or motorless (fixed filter, used when
measuring a single species).
Wavelength Valid
This indicates if the wavelength specified for each lamp\filter com-
bination is valid. Press the Wavelength Valid button to view the
Wavelength Valid pop-up window (Figure 6-16.3), which expands the
Wavelength Valid code into individual lamp\filter combinations (e.g.,
L2F6=Lamp 2-Filter 6. Press again to hide the pop-up window.
A ‘1’ below a lamp\filter combination indicates that wavelength is
valid in the Optical Bench and is used (i.e., a filter is installed).
A ‘0’ below a lamp\filter combination indicates that wavelength is not
used and thus not valid.

Figure 6-16.3.
Wavelength Valid
diagnostic pop-up
window.

UV Species Valid
This indicates if a UV species is being measured and thus valid. Press
the UV Species Valid button to view the UV Species Valid pop-up
window (Figure 6-16.4), which expands the Species Valid code into
individual species (e.g., SO2, NO, NO2, NOx, H2S). Press again to
hide the pop-up window.
A ‘1’ below a species indicates that species is being measured and thus
valid.
A ‘0’ below a species indicates that species is not being measured and
thus not valid.

Figure 6-16.4.
UV Species Valid
diagnostic pop-up
window.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-41


Viewing Data Trending Diagnostic Information

The Data Trending diagnostic screen allows you to display, in a graphical


format, trends of real-time concentration results of each UV species be-
ing measured by the analyzer (UV Analyzer Results), UV Optical Bench
related signals (UV Bench Signals), and the species being measured by
optional sensors (Sensor Signals). While working from the Data Trending
diagnostic screen, press the button for the data set you wish to view on a
graph. These three operations are described in the following pages.

This screen also allows you to log data trending information stored in the
HMI directly to a USB Flash Drive using two different methods, for further
analysis on a computer (these methods are described later in this section):

• One-time transfer of trend data.

• Continuous transfer of trend data.

! Hazardous Locations
Do not cycle the analyzer power on if there is a hazardous gas
WARNING
atmosphere present, unless a power-disconnect switch (approved
for the Hazardous Area) has been installed for use with the ana-
lyzer.

Do not remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover and do not attempt


to connect or disconnect the USB Flash Drive (or cable) to or
from the USB port on the HMI if there is a hazardous gas atmo-
sphere present. Before connecting a USB Flash Drive (or cable) to
the USB port on the HMI, test the area around the analyzer for
hazardous gases and proceed only when the area is found to be
safe.

For Division 2/Zone 2 analyzers, ensure the USB Flash Drive is


secured in the USB port with its Locking Clip.

6-42 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


 DIAGData Trending

Figure 6-17.1.
Data Trending
diagnostic screen.

Other information on the Data Trending screen related to the transfer of


data includes:

• The USB DRIVE indicators alert you to the current status of the USB
Flash Drive, either:
- inserted: When this light is ORANGE, it indicates there is a USB
Flash Drive inserted into the USB port on the HMI. When OFF, it
indicates there is no USB Flash Drive connected or the data trans-
fer is complete.
or
- writing: When this light is ORANGE, it indicates the HMI is
transferring data to the USB Flash Drive. Do not remove the USB
Flash Drive from the HMI while data is being written to it. When
OFF, it indicates there is no data being transferred to the USB Flash
Drive or the data transfer is complete.

• The LOGGING TO USB switch allows you to initiate the transfer of


trend data to a USB Flash Drive.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-43


Saving Trend Data From the HMI to a USB Flash Drive – One-Time Transfer

The Data Trending screen (Figure 6-17.1) is used to initiate the transfer of
analyzer information to a USB Flash Drive.

 The HMI stores the latest 12 hours of trend data. This procedure al-
lows for a one-time transfer of the data stored on the HMI to the USB
NOTE
Flash Drive.

 Each Trend data point


is one per minute.

Figure 6-17.2.
USB drive contents.
• Four directories for four trend data groups:
o SAMP01: UV analysis results including UV1 to UV9 Concentration.
o SAMP02: Sensor measurements including BoardTemp, BenchTemp, CellTemp, CellPres, FlowRate, O2% and O2Temp.
o SAMP03: UV bench signal group A including PMT Signals and Lamp Base and Pulse Current,
o SAMP03: UV bench signal group B including PMT HV, Lamp HV and Motor and Wheel RPM.

To do a one-time transfer of trend data from the HMI to the USB Flash
Drive:

1. From the Data Trending screen, check to ensure the “inserted” light is
on (ORANGE).

! Before removing the USB Flash Drive in Step 2, power down the
analyzer/HMI unit and then disconnect the HMI’s Communication
WARNING
module from its HMI Display to allow access to the USB Flash Drive.

See “Removing/Replacing the USB Flash Drive” in Chapter 3 for in-


formation on how to safely remove and replace the USB Flash Drive.

6-44 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


2. Start transferring data by pressing the LOGGING TO USB switch to
turn it ON. Once ON is indicated, change the switch back to OFF. The
transfer of trend data will start and both “inserted” and “writing” lights
turn on (ORANGE). Do not remove the USB Flash Drive from the
HMI while data is being written to it.

The data transfer will take several seconds. When both “inserted” and
“writing” lights turn off, the USB Flash Drive can be safely removed. Fig-
ure 6-17.2 shows the contents of the USB Flash Drive, and describes how
the different directories are used.

Continuous Logging of Trend Data to a USB Flash Drive

 The USB Flash Drive supplied by AMETEK (comes inserted in the


analyzer HMI’s USB port on the bottom of the HMI, inside the
NOTE
analyzer enclosure) is 1 GB, which can store approximately 2.5 years
of continuously logged data. However, to avoid problems with logging
data to the USB Flash Drive, AMETEK recommends saving the logged
data to a PC annually (such as during regular maintenance) and then
deleting the contents of the USB Flash Drive.

To start continuous logging of trend data from the HMI to the USB Flash
Drive:

1. On the Data Trending screen, check to ensure the “inserted” light is on


(ORANGE).

2. Press the LOGGING TO USB switch to turn it ON. This will initiate
data logging and the transfer of trend data continuously to the USB Flash
Drive.

To stop continuous logging of trend data to the USB Flash Drive:

1. Press the LOGGING TO USB switch to turn it OFF. This will stop data
logging and the transfer of trend data to the USB Flash Drive.

2. On the Data Trending screen, check the “inserted” light is on


(ORANGE).

3. Wait for both “inserted” and “writing” lights to turn off.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-45


Graphing UV Analysis Results

Press the UV Analysis Results button to view trend graphs of the UV spe-
cies being analyzed and to configure the concentration range you wish to
view. From the UV Analysis Result Trend Graphs screen, change the high
and low Y-AXIS concentration ranges you wish to view, then press one of
the buttons to view the corresponding group of UV species in graphi-
cal format. See Figure 6-17.6 for an example of a Trend Graph screen.

 DIAGData Trending
UV Analysis Results

Figure 6-17.3.
UV Analysis Result
Trend Graphs
diagnostic screen.

Graphing UV Optical Bench Signal Results

Press the UV Bench Signal button to view trend graphs of signals derived
from the Optical Bench and to configure the signal range you wish to
view. From the UV Bench Signal Trend Graphs screen, change the high
and low Y-AXIS range of values you wish to view, then press one of the
buttons to view the information in graphical format. See Figure 6-17.6
for an example of a Trend Graph screen.

 DIAGData Trending
UV Bench Signals

Figure 6-17.4.
UV Bench Signal
Trend Graphs
diagnostic screen.

6-46 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Graphing Sensor Signal Results

Press the Sensor Signals button to view trend graphs of the signals from
each of the optional (installed) sensors and to configure the signal range
you wish to view. From the Sensor Signal Trend Graphs screen, change
the high and low Y-AXIS range of values you wish to view, then press one
of the buttons to view the information in graphical format. See Figure
6-17.6 for an example of a Trend Graph screen. If a sensor is not installed
or enabled, the button will not be displayed.

 DIAGData Trending
Sensor Signals

Figure 6-17.5.
Sensor Signal Trend
Graphs diagnostic
screen.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-47


Working From a Trend Data Graph

When you press a graph ( ) button from one of the Trend Graph
setup screens, the data you selected is sent to a graph. Figure 6-17.6 is an
example of a Trend Graph.
Valid or installed parameters will have a white background

 DIAGData Trending
<<data trend option>>

Figure 6-17.6.
Example, Data Trend
graph diagnostic
screen.

While working from a Trend Graph, the following navigation buttons are
available:

Press To
Scroll backward; view trend data before the current data point (only if more
than a full screen of data has been collected).

Scroll forward; view trend data after the current data point.

Pause the graph.

Zoom in on the graphed trend data.

Zoom out on the graphed trend data.

 The , , , and
Graph has been paused.
buttons are active only if the Trend
NOTE

6-48 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


While working with Trend Graphs, the following rules apply:
• Time axis: When live (i.e., not paused), the major tick=1 hour; minor
tick=½ hour.
• Available only while graph has been paused:
- Scroll backward/forward in 1-hour increments (total of 12 hours of
trend data).

- Zoom in=half-time span (i.e., 4 hr2 hr1 hr½ hr).

- Zoom out=2-times span (i.e., ½ hr1 hr2 hr4 hr).

• Data point=1 per minute.


• After pausing the graph, touch the graph area to display the cursor.
Move the cursor by touching another area on the screen. When the
cursor is displayed, the associated time and data values are shown
above the graph area.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-49


Viewing Status Code Conditions on the HMI
The UV Bench Status diagnostic screen displays the current status of all
analyzer Status Code conditions, plus indicates active Warning and Fault
conditions associated with the analyzer Status Code.

If Warning and/or Fault conditions are triggered by the analyzer, further in-
vestigation into the cause of the condition and correction of the problem(s) is
required to ensure the analyzer operates problem-free. This section describes
how to determine which status codes (Warning or Fault) are active, possible
trigger conditions, and steps to take to correct or reset the conditions.

If Status Code conditions have been detected, the sum of their respective
primary codes is displayed to the right of the Status Code1/2/3. To view
the condition(s) that are active, press the corresponding button. De-
pending on which button is pressed, the corresponding Status Code (1, 2,
or 3) screen will be displayed. To view more status conditions, press .
To return to the previous screen, press .

 DIAGSystem Status

Figure 6-18.1.
System Status
diagnostic screen.

Run Time
This is the amount of time the Bench Controller board has been per-
forming controls since the analyzer was last powered up or reset.

Status Code 1/2/3


Displays active analyzer status conditions which, if detected, the sum of
their respective primary codes is displayed to the right of Status Code#.
If the code beside Status Code# is:
• WHITE – the status is normal; no Warning or Fault conditions
have been detected.
• ORANGE – a Warning condition has been detected.
• RED – a Fault condition has been detected.

6-50 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Analyzer Diagnostic Status Codes, Trigger Conditions, and
Corrective Action

The Status Code (1, 2, or 3) Screens and Diagnostics sections in the follow-
ing pages list all of the analyzer status conditions. These status conditions
are described using the following information:

Status Code (1, 2, or 3) Message


Describes the name of each status code condition, as they appear on
the HMI.

Description
Describes the status code condition.

Trigger Condition
Describes the possible causes that can trigger the status condition.

Corrective Action
Describes the conditions that must be met and the action that must be
taken to correct the conditions that triggered the condition.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-51


Status Code 1 Screens and Diagnostics

These status code conditions are derived from the Optical Bench. After
performing each Corrective Action procedure, check the Status Code
screen to see if the condition has been reset.

 For location of cables referenced in the Status Code 1 Diagnostic chart, refer
to the “Analyzer Wiring Diagram” in Appendix C.
NOTE

For spare parts ordering information, refer to Chapter 7.

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code1

Figure 6-18.2.
Status Code1 diagnostic
screen (1 of 2),
UV Bench Status.

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code1

Figure 6-18.3.
Status Code1 diagnostic
screen (2 of 2),
UV Bench Status.

6-52 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
PMT data not received The Bench Controller board did not receive any PMT data sets in the last Bench
diagnostic cycle.

Trigger Condition:

• The cable (Cable 3) between the Bench Controller board and the PMT Supply
board may be disconnected, may not be properly installed, or may be faulty.

• Problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Supply board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the PMT Supply Board Ribbon Cable (Cable 3) between the Bench Con-
troller board and the PMT Supply board for proper connections and inspect it for
damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the boards.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and power
down the analyzer to make the following check:

- Remove the PMT Block cover (see Figure 6-5 for location) and check the connec-
tions between the PMT Supply board and the PMT Signal board. Ensure all pins
on both connectors are properly seated in the sockets.

WARNING:
High voltage exists on the PMT Supply board. Do not touch the connec-
tor or pins.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the PMT Data Communication Circuit on the Bench Controller
board, or problems with the PMT Signal board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-53


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
PMT data reception The Bench Controller board has detected errors in at least one of the PMT data sets
error received in the last Bench diagnostic cycle.

Trigger Condition:

• The cable (Cable 3) between the Bench Controller board and the PMT HV Supply
board may not be properly installed, or may be faulty.

• Problem with PMT Signal board or PMT Supply board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the PMT Supply Board Ribbon Cable (Cable 3) between the Bench Con-
troller board and the PMT Supply board for proper connections and inspect it for
damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.)

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the boards.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and power
down the analyzer to make the following check:

- Remove the PMT Block cover (see Figure 6-5 for location) and check the connec-
tions between the PMT Supply board and the PMT Signal board. Ensure all pins
on both connectors are properly seated in the sockets.

WARNING:
High voltage exists on the PMT Supply board. Do not touch the connec-
tor or pins.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the PMT Data Communication Circuit on the Bench Controller
board, or problems with the PMT Signal board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-54 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
PMT data range error One of the Measure-PMT or Reference-PMT readings is outside 0.5 % to 98 % of the
ADC range (i.e., below 0.05 V or above 9.8 V).

Trigger Condition:

• The status condition may be triggered upon analyzer power-up while the Bench is
warming up to its temperature control setpoint, but will clear after the Bench has
properly warmed up to its normal operating temperature.

• Low Measure-PMT signal level may be caused by concentration level exceeding the
maximum expected range for a given Measuring Cell length. The status will clear
itself once the high concentration occurrence from the process stream ends.

• ALC function may have been turned OFF.

• Problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Supply board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

• Problem with the UV source lamp(s) (e.g., lamps may be nearing the end of their
operational lives), or faulty socket and wiring.

• Problem with the PMT(s).

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI, view the PMT Signals screen to check the PMT signal for each
 DIAGPMT Signals
valid wavelength to see which lamp\filter combination(s) cause the condition. If the
condition is triggered by wavelengths from the same lamp, that lamp may need to be
replaced. If the condition is triggered by signals from the same PMT (i.e., Ref PMT or
Msr PMT), that PMT may be faulty.

• From the HMI, view the Auto Setup Results screen to check if the ALC switch is
 CONFIGUV Bench
SetupAuto Setup Results
OFF. If necessary, turn it ON.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the lamps to ensure they are firing. This is evident if an orange flicker or
glow can be seen in the lamps.

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly, and that the Lamp Sockets
are properly connected. To verify lamp types and locations, check the “9900_
Signed Final QC document”.

- Check the lamps to ensure they are not damaged. Replace them if necessary. Re-
fer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for information about the lamps
and replacing them.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the boards.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the PMT Signal Monitoring Circuit and PMT Control Circuit or the
Lamp Current Signal Monitoring Circuit and Lamp Current Control Circuit on the
Bench Controller board. It can also indicate problems with the PMT Signal board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-55


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
PMT HV range error The Measure-PMT HV or Reference-PMT HV reading is outside ±10 % of its control
setpoint which can be viewed on the Auto Setup Results screen.

Trigger Condition:

• Bench Auto Setup not completed successfully.

• Problem with the PMT Supply board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI, view the PMT\Motor Operations screen and check the Measure-
 DIAGPMT\Motor Ops
PMT HV or Reference-PMT HV readings to see if they are outside their setpoints. If
so, the PMT Supply board may be faulty.

• Initiate another Auto Setup to try to clear the problems. Refer to the section “Source
Lamps Replacement” in this chapter for information about how to do this.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the boards.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The Auto Setup does not clear the problem.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the PMT Signal Monitoring Circuit and PMT Control Circuit on the
Bench Controller board. It can also indicate problems with the PMTs or the PMT
Supply board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-56 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Lamp1 current error The measured Lamp1 Base/Lamp2 Base current is outside ±200 µA of its setpoint or
Lamp2 current error is below 50 µA. Or, one of the measured Lamp1/Filter and Lamp2/Filter combination
pulse currents is outside ±1.5 mA of its pulse control level.

Trigger Condition:

• Lamp1/Lamp2 base current level not properly set.

• Problem with Lamp1 or Lamp2 (e.g., lamps may be nearing the end of their opera-
tional lives, or faulty socket and wiring).

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- View the Lamp Operations screen to check the measured Lamp1 Base/Lamp2
 DIAGLamp Ops
Base and Lamp1/Filter and Lamp2/Filter combination pulse currents and
compare them to the values on the Auto Setup Results screen to see if they are
 CONFIGUV Bench
SetupAuto Setup Results
outside of their pulse control levels.

- Initiate another Auto Setup to try to clear the problems. Refer to the section
“Source Lamps Replacement” in this chapter for information about how to do this.

• Determine the age of the lamps to see if the lamps are approaching the end of their
useful lives (approximately 270 days). The lamps may need to be replaced. Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the corresponding Lamp Socket Cable to ensure its socket is properly con-
nected at the lamp and at the Bench Controller board (J201). Inspect the cable
for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly, and that the Lamp Sockets
are properly connected. To verify, check the “9900_Signed Final QC” document for
lamp types and locations.

- Check the lamp that caused the condition to ensure it is not damaged. Replace it if
necessary. Refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle the
analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- The Auto Setup does not clear the problem.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Lamp Current Signal Monitoring Circuit or the Lamp Current Con-
trol Circuit on the Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-57


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Lamp1 HV error The measured Lamp1 Base HV/Lamp2 Base HV is within 15 % of the maximum lamp
Lamp2 HV error HV value (i.e., above 297.5 V). Or, one of the measured Lamp1 Pulse HV/Lamp2 Pulse
HV is within 10 % of the maximum (i.e., above 315 V).

Trigger Condition:

• Lamp1/Lamp2 base current level not properly set.

• Bench Auto Setup not completed successfully.

• Problem with Lamp1 or Lamp2 (e.g., lamps may be nearing the end of their opera-
tional lives, or faulty socket and wiring).

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- View the Auto Setup Results screen to check Lamp1 Base/Lamp2 Base current
 CONFIGUV Bench
SetupAuto Setup Results
readings to see if they are outside their setpoints.

- View the Lamp Operations screen to check Lamp1 Base/Lamp2 Base HV read-
 DIAGLamp Ops
ings to check if they are within 15 % of the maximum lamp HV value and to check
the measured Lamp1/Lamp2 Pulse HV readings to see if they are within 10 % of
the maximum.

- Initiate another Auto Setup to try to clear the problems. Refer to the section
“Source Lamps Replacement” in this chapter for information about how to do this.

• Determine the age of the lamps to see if the lamps are approaching the end of their
useful lives (approximately 270 days). The lamps may need to be replaced. Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the corresponding Lamp Socket Cable to ensure its socket is properly con-
nected at the lamp and at the Bench Controller board (J201). Inspect the cable
for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly), and that the Lamp Sockets
are connected properly. To verify, check the “9900_Signed Final QC” document for
lamp types and locations.

- Check the lamp that caused the condition to ensure it is not damaged. Replace it if
necessary. Refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- The Auto Setup does not clear the problem.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Lamp Current Signal Monitoring Circuit on the Bench Controller
board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-58 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Filter wheel timing mark The Bench Controller board did not detect any Filter Wheel timing mark in the last
not detected Bench diagnostic cycle.

Trigger Condition:
 This status code
condition applies only to
• The Filter Wheel Opto-interruptor cable or Filter Wheel Motor cable may be discon-
nected, may not be installed properly, or may be faulty.
Multi-Species (Motorized
Optical Bench) or Multi-Range
• Problem with the Filter Wheel Opto-interruptor.
Analyzers.
• Problem with the Filter Wheel drive belt or bearings.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure and:

- Check the Opto-interruptor cable (Cable 4, at J304 on Bench Controller board)


and Filter Wheel Motor cable (at J303 on Bench Controller board) to ensure they
are properly connected and inspect them for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks,
etc.).

Caution (Division 2/Zone 2 applications):


The Motor cable is equipped with a locking mechanism. If this cable
needs to be disconnected, a sharp object must be used to press the
locking tab before pulling the plug from the header. Failure to do so will
break the tab and render the analyzer unsafe for Division 2/Zone 2 ap-
plications. See “Filter Wheel Motor Cable, Connector Detail” drawing in
Appendix C for details.

- Check the frequency of the Opto-interruptor at TP310 on the Bench Controller


board. The frequency should be between 4.5 to 6.5 Hz (typical). If it is outside this
range, the Opto-interruptor may be faulty.

- Check the frequency of the Motor at TP309 on the Bench Controller board. The
frequency should be between 120 to 140 Hz (typical). If it is outside this range, the
Motor may be faulty.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle the
analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• If cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition, cycle the power Off
again, disassemble the Filter Assembly (part of Optical Bench Assembly), and check
for:

- A broken Filter Wheel drive belt.

- A problem with the Filter Wheel bearings.

If these parts are damaged, replace them. Refer to the section “Filter Wheel Mainte-
nance – Motorized Optical Bench Analyzers” in this chapter.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- A cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Opto-interruptor, or the Opto-interruptor Signal Conditioning Cir-
cuit or Motor Power Supply Circuit on the Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-59


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Motor pulse not The Bench Controller board did not detect any Filter Wheel Motor timing pulse in the
detected last Bench diagnostic cycle.

Trigger Condition:
 This status code
condition applies only to
• The Filter Wheel Motor cable may be disconnected, may not be installed properly, or
may be faulty.
Multi-Species (Motorized
Optical Bench) or Multi-Range • Problem with the Filter Wheel Motor.
Analyzers.
• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the Filter Wheel Motor cable (at J303 on Bench Controller board) to
ensure it is properly connected and inspect it for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks,
etc.).

Caution (Division 2/Zone 2 applications):


The Motor cable is equipped with a locking mechanism. If this cable
needs to be disconnected, a sharp object must be used to press the
locking tab before pulling the plug from the header. Failure to do so will
break the tab and render the analyzer unsafe for Division 2/Zone 2 ap-
plications. See “Filter Wheel Motor Cable, Connector Detail” drawing in
Appendix C for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle the
analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The Filter Wheel Motor or its cable appears damaged – order a new part and
replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Motor Speed Pulse Signal Conditioning Circuit or Motor Power
Supply Circuit on the Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-60 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Filter wheel speed out The measured Filter Wheel speed is outside ±15 % of the nominal speed (i.e., below
of range 277 RPM or above 373 RPM).

Trigger Condition:
 This status code
condition applies only to
• The Filter Wheel Opto-interruptor cable or Filter Wheel Motor cable may not be
installed properly, or may be faulty.
Multi-Species (Motorized
Optical Bench) or Multi-Range • Problem with the Filter Wheel Opto-interruptor.
Analyzers.
• Problem with the Filter Wheel drive belt or bearings.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• View the PMT\Motor Operations screen and check if the Filter Wheel RPM reading
is outside its nominal speed range.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the Opto-interruptor cable (Cable 4, at J304 on Bench Controller board)


and Filter Wheel Motor cable (at J303 on Bench Controller board) to ensure they
are properly connected and inspect them for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks,
etc.).

Caution (Division 2/Zone 2 applications):


The Motor cable is equipped with a locking mechanism. If this cable
needs to be disconnected, a sharp object must be used to press the
locking tab before pulling the plug from the header. Failure to do so will
break the tab and render the analyzer unsafe for Division 2/Zone 2 ap-
plications. See “Filter Wheel Motor Cable, Connector Detail” drawing in
Appendix C for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• If cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition, cycle the power Off
again, disassemble the Filter Assembly (part of Optical Bench Assembly), and check
for:

- Filter Wheel drive belt slippage.

- A problem with the Filter Wheel bearings or drive shaft.

If the Filter Wheel drive belt is stretched or the other parts are damaged or worn,
replace them. Refer to “Filter Wheel Maintenance – Motorized Optical Bench Analyz-
ers” in this chapter.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable or other internal parts appear damaged – order new parts and replace
them.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Opto-interruptor, or the Opto-interruptor Signal Conditioning Cir-
cuit on the Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-61


Status Code 1 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Motor speed out of The measured Filter Wheel Motor speed is outside ±15 % of the nominal speed (i.e.,
range below 2210 RPM or above 2990 RPM).

Trigger Condition:
 This status code
condition applies only to
• The Filter Wheel Motor cable may not be installed properly, or may be faulty.
Multi-Species (Motorized • Problem with Filter Wheel Motor.
Optical Bench) or Multi-Range
Analyzers. • Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• View the PMT\Motor Operations screen and check if the Motor RPM reading is
outside its nominal speed range.

• Check the Filter Wheel Motor cable (at J303 on Bench Controller board) to ensure it
is properly connected and inspect it for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

Caution (Division 2/Zone 2 applications):


The Motor cable is equipped with a locking mechanism. If this cable
needs to be disconnected, a sharp object must be used to press the
locking tab before pulling the plug from the header. Failure to do so will
break the tab and render the analyzer unsafe for Division 2/Zone 2 ap-
plications. See “Filter Wheel Motor Cable, Connector Detail” drawing in
Appendix C for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the Motor is not operating properly – order a new
part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Motor Speed Pulse Signal Conditioning Circuit or Motor Power
Supply Circuit on the Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-62 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 2 Screens and Diagnostics

These status code conditions are derived from the Optical Bench and the
Customer I/O board. After performing each Corrective Action procedure,
check the Status Code screen to see if the condition has been reset.

 For location of cables referenced in the Status Code 2 Diagnostic chart, refer
to the “Analyzer Wiring Diagram” in Appendix C.
NOTE

For spare parts ordering information, refer to Chapter 7.

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code2

Figure 6-18.4.
Status Code2 diagnostic
screen (1 of 2),
UV Bench Status.

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code2

Figure 6-18.5.
Status Code2 diagnostic
screen (2 of 2),
UV Bench Status.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-63


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Customer IO board The Bench Controller board has detected that the Customer I/O board has been
disconnected disconnected unexpectedly.

Trigger Condition:

• The communication cable (Cable 2) between the Bench Controller board and the
Customer I/O board may be disconnected, may not be properly connected, or may
be faulty.

• Problem with the Customer I/O board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check the cable between the Bench Controller board (J602) and the Customer
I/O board (J1) for proper connection and inspect it for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

- Check the power supply cables to the Bench Controller board (cable from AC
Power Distribution/MOV board, connects to J604; cable from 24 VDC Power
Supply, connects to J101) for proper connections and inspect them for damage
(cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any prob-
lems with the boards.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- A cable appears damaged – order a new cable.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board or the Customer I/O board firmware,
or a problem with the Communication Circuit on the Bench Controller board or
the Customer I/O board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-64 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
AOut-D/-C/-B/-A out of The data source assigned to analog output channel -D/-C/-B/-A is invalid. Or, the value
range or invalid of the assigned data source is 2 % outside of the full-scale range.
assignment
Trigger Condition:

• Problem with the data source assignment.

• The full-scale range is incorrectly set.

• Process upset causing high concentration occurrence.

Corrective Action:

• If the cause is due to a process upset, the status will clear itself once the process
upset occurrence ends.

• From the HMI, view the Analog Output Setup screen and:

- Check the numbers (data source assignment) in the Assignment code field for
the problematic analog output channels. Compare these numbers to the codes in
the Analog Output Assignment Code screens to ensure they correspond. For
more information about the Assignment codes, refer to the section “Analog Output
Setup” in Chapter 4.

- Check the low Scale and/or high Scale output value for each output and com-
pare them to their corresponding values on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If
necessary, adjust the analog output range.

• Check the sample system for plugs or leaks, as described under “Detecting a Plug
in the Sample System” in this chapter.

• Check to see if there has been a process upset.

• Contact AMETEK Service if:

- There has been a process upset, it has been corrected, and the condition still has
not reset.

- The concentration(s) of the species in the process stream appear to be too high
or too low for the Measuring Cell installed in the analyzer.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-65


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench setup error The Bench Auto Setup function completes unsuccessfully.

Trigger Condition:

• Weak PMT Signal(s) due to process gas or span gas in the Measuring Cell, or Cell
contamination, when an Auto Setup has been initiated.

• Problem with the UV lamp(s) (e.g., lamps may be nearing the end of their opera-
tional lives, or faulty socket and wiring).

• Problem with Bench Auto Setup parameters.

• Problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Supply board.

• Problems with the optical filters.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Check to ensure Zero gas is flowing through the Measuring Cell prior to initiating an
Auto Setup.

• Determine the age of the lamps to see if they are approaching the end of their use-
ful lives (approximately 270 days). The lamps may need to be replaced. Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for details.

• From the HMI:

- View the PMT\Motor Operations screen and check the voltage being supplied to
 DIAGPMT\Motor Ops
each PMT to see if one of the PMT high voltage controls is not within 2 % of the
minimum (below 310 V) or maximum (above 790 V) values.

- View the Lamp Operations screen and check the measured Lamp1/Filter and
 DIAGLamp Ops
Lamp2/Filter combination pulse Base current readings to ensure the unused
wavelengths (lamp-filter combinations) are set to the Base (mA) values.

- View the UV Bench Setup screen and check the Target PMT Signal and

Setup
CONFIGUV Bench
Lamp1/2 Base (ma) values to ensure they have not been adjusted from the
factory settings. Verify this by comparing them to the values on the “9900_CFG
Report” document.

- View the UV Bench Info screen and check to ensure the Wavelength Valid and
 DIAGUV Bench Info
UV Species Valid values have not been changed from the values on the “9900_
CFG Report” document.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check both Lamp Socket cables to ensure they are properly connected at the
lamps and at the Bench Controller board (J201). Inspect the cables for damage
(cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

Check the Lamp Sockets to ensure they have not been switched in the Optical
Bench (i.e., Lamp 1 socket is connected to Lamp 1 – Lamp 1 is closest to the
Bench Controller board).

(Continued next page.)

6-66 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench setup error (Continued from previous page.)

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly, and that the Lamp Sock-
ets are properly connected. To verify, check the “9900_Signed Final QC” docu-
ment for lamp types and locations.

- Check both lamps to ensure they are not damaged. Replace them if necessary.
Refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any prob-
lems with the boards.

• If the reset doesn’t correct the problem, check the Measuring Cell Windows to
ensure they are clean and not damaged. While the Cell is removed, check for leaks
from the Measuring Cell into the Reflector Block and Lamp Block Assembly. Clean
and/or replace any damaged parts. Replace all o-rings. This procedure is discussed
under “Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance” in this chapter.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Lamp Current Signal Monitoring Circuit, Lamp Current Control
Circuit, PMT Signal Monitoring Circuit, or PMT Control Circuit on the Bench
Controller board. It can also indicate problems with PMT Signal board or PMT
Supply board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.
ALC setpoint error One of the ALC setpoints is outside 2 % to 98 % of the ADC range (i.e., below 0.2 V or
above 9.8 V).

Trigger Condition:

• Problem with Bench Auto Setup function (e.g., Auto Setup not completed success-
fully or incorrect Auto Setup parameters).

Corrective Action:

• Determine the age of the lamps to see if they are approaching the end of their use-
ful lives (approximately 270 days). The lamps may need to be replaced. Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for details.

• From the HMI:

- Initiate another Auto Setup. Refer to the section “Source Lamps Replacement,”
earlier in this chapter, for information about how to do this.

- View the UV Bench Setup screen and check the Target PMT Signal and

Setup
CONFIGUV Bench
Lamp1/2 Base (ma) values to ensure they have not been adjusted from the
factory settings. Verify this by comparing them to the values on the “9900_CFG
Report” document.

(Continued next page.)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-67


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
ALC setpoint error (Continued from previous page.)

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- Check both Lamp Socket cables to ensure they are properly connected at the
lamps and at the Bench Controller board (J201). Inspect the cables for damage
(cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

Check the Lamp Sockets to ensure they have not been switched in the Optical
Bench (i.e., Lamp 1 socket is connected to Lamp 1 – Lamp 1 is closest to the
Bench Controller board).

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly, and that the Lamp Sock-
ets are properly connected. To verify, check the “9900_Signed Final QC” docu-
ment for lamp types and locations.

- Check both lamps to ensure they are not damaged. Replace them if necessary.
Refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any prob-
lems with the boards.

• If the reset doesn’t correct the problem, check the Measuring Cell Windows to
ensure they are clean and not damaged. While the Cell is removed, check for leaks
from the Measuring Cell into the Reflector Block and Lamp Block Assembly. Clean
and/or replace any damaged parts. Replace all o-rings. This procedure is discussed
under “Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance” in this chapter.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Lamp Current Signal Monitoring Circuit, Lamp Current Control
Circuit, PMT Signal Monitoring Circuit, or PMT Control Circuit on the Bench
Controller board. It can also indicate problems with PMT Signal board or PMT
Supply board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-68 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
ALC low error The ALC function has adjusted one of the lamp pulse currents to the base current
level of the corresponding lamp.

Trigger Condition:

• Problem with the UV lamp(s) (e.g., incorrect replacement lamp, lamps may be near-
ing the end of their operational lives, or faulty socket and wiring).

• Problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Supply board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI, view the Lamp Operations screen to check the Lamp1 Pulse mA
 DIAGLamp Ops
and Lamp2 Pulse mA readings to see which lamp-filter combinations have reached
at or below the base lamp current level.

• Determine the age of the lamps to see if the lamps are approaching the end of their
useful lives (approximately 270 days). The lamps may need to be replaced. Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly, and that the Lamp Sock-
ets are properly connected. To verify, check the “9900_Signed Final QC” docu-
ment for lamp types and locations.

- Check the Lamp Sockets to ensure they have not been switched in the Optical
Bench (i.e., Lamp 1 socket is connected to Lamp 1 – Lamp 1 is closest to the
Bench Controller board).

Check both Lamp Socket cables to ensure they are properly connected at the
lamps and at the Bench Controller board (J201). Inspect the cables for damage
(cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

- Check the lamps to ensure they are not damaged. Replace them if necessary.
Refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any prob-
lems with the boards.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Lamp Current Control Circuit or PMT Control Circuit on the
Bench Controller board, or a problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Sup-
ply board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-69


Status Code 2 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
ALC high error The ALC function has adjusted one of the lamp pulse currents to 98 % of the
maximum current level (i.e., 13.72 mA).

Trigger Condition:

• Problem with the UV lamp(s) (e.g., incorrect replacement lamp, lamps may be near-
ing the end of their operational lives, or faulty socket and wiring).

• Problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Supply board.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI, view the Lamp Operations screen to check the Lamp1 Pulse mA
 DIAGLamp Ops
and Lamp2 Pulse mA readings to see which lamp-filter combinations have reached
the maximum lamp current level.

• Determine the age of the lamps to see if the lamps are approaching the end of their
useful lives (approximately 270 days). The lamps may need to be replaced. Refer to
“Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter for details.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and:

- If the analyzer uses two different types of lamps, check the lamps to ensure they
are in the correct location in the Lamp Block Assembly, and that the Lamp Sock-
ets are properly connected. To verify, check the “9900_Signed Final QC” docu-
ment for lamp types and locations.

- Check the Lamp Sockets to ensure they have not been switched in the Optical
Bench (i.e., Lamp 1 socket is connected to Lamp 1 – Lamp 1 is closest to the
Bench Controller board).

Check both Lamp Socket cables to ensure they are properly connected at the
lamps and at the Bench Controller board (J201). Inspect the cables for damage
(cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).

- Check the lamps to ensure they are not damaged. Replace them if necessary.
Refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this chapter.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any prob-
lems with the boards.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Lamp Current Control Circuit or PMT Control Circuit on the
Bench Controller board, or a problem with the PMT Signal board or PMT Sup-
ply board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-70 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Screens and Diagnostics

These status code conditions are derived from the standard and optional
sensors (if installed) and the Optical Bench. After performing each Correc-
tive Action procedure, check the Status Code screen to see if the condition
has been reset.

 For location of cables referenced in the Status Code 3 Diagnostic chart, refer
to the “Analyzer Wiring Diagram” in Appendix C.
NOTE

For spare parts ordering information, refer to Chapter 7.

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code3

Figure 6-18.6.
Status Code3 diagnostic
screen (1 of 2),
UV Bench Status.

 DIAGUV Bench
StatusStatus Code3

Figure 6-18.7
Status Code3 diagnostic
screen (2 of 2),
UV Bench Status.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-71


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
O2 sensor error The O2 Sensor temperature is 15 °C below or 10 °C above of the Bench Controller
board temperature.

 This status code


condition applies only to
Trigger Condition:

• Problem with O2 Sensor cable.


analyzers with the optional
O2 Sensor installed.
• Problem with O2 Sensor.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI, view the Sensor Setup screen and check the O2 Concentration

Setup
CONFIGSensor
High/Low Scale to verify they are within acceptable levels. Compare the readings
to the values listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and check the O2 Sensor cable (Cable 1) to ensure it is properly connected at
the Bench Controller board (J307). Inspect the cable for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

• Test the O2 Sensor for proper operation and replace it if necessary. Refer to the O2
Sensor manual shipped with the analyzer for information on how to verify proper
sensor operation.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer; this may also clear any prob-
lems with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the O2 Sensor does not appear to be operating
properly – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Oxygen Sensor Signal Conditioning Circuit on the Bench Con-
troller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-72 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Flow rate range error The measured flow rate is outside ±1 % of the full-scale range of the Flow Sensor.

Trigger Condition:
 This status code
condition applies only to
• Problem with sample flow (e.g., plugging, or faulty regulator).
analyzers with the optional
• Problem with Flow Sensor scaling parameters.
Flow Sensor installed.
• Problem with the Flow Sensor cable.

• Problem with the Flow Sensor.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- View the Sensor Signals diagnostic screen and check the Flow Rate reading to
 DIAGSensor Signals
verify there is a flow of sample gas. If there is no or low flow, it may indicate a plug
in the sample system. Refer also to “Detecting a Plug in the Sample System” in
this chapter. Unplug the lines if necessary.

- View the Sensor Setup screen and check the Flow Rate Low Scale/High Scale

Setup
CONFIGSensor
parameters. Compare the readings to the value listed on the “9900_CFG Report”
document and adjust the scaling parameters if necessary.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and check the Flow Sensor cable (Cable 5) to ensure it is properly connected
at the Bench Controller board (J306). Inspect the cable for damage (cuts, nicks,
burn marks, etc.).

• Check the Flow Regulator to ensure it is working properly; replace if necessary.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

- Test the Flow Sensor for proper operation and replace it if necessary. Refer to the
Flow Sensor documentation shipped with the analyzer for information on how to
verify proper sensor operation.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems with the Bench Controller
board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the Flow Sensor does not appear to be operating
properly – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Flow Sensor Signal Conditioning Circuit on the Bench Control-
ler board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-73


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Cell pressure range The measured cell pressure is outside ± 15 % of the nominal cell pressure.
error
Trigger Condition:

 This status code


condition applies only to
• Nominal Cell Pressure has not been entered or is incorrect.

• Problem with sample system (e.g., plugging, or faulty regulator).


analyzers with the optional
Cell Pressure Transducer • Problem with Pressure Transducer scaling parameters.
installed.
• Problem with the Pressure Transducer cable.

• Problem with the Pressure Transducer.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- View the Sample Cell Conditions screen and check the Nominal Cell Pressure
 CONFIGUV
AnalysisSample Cell
value to verify it agrees with the Pressure value listed on the “9900_CFG Report”
document, or that of the process pressure. If necessary, change the Nominal Cell
Pressure value.
Conditions


Setup
CONFIGSensor
- View the Sensor Setup screen and check the Flow Rate reading to verify there is
a flow of sample gas. If there is no or low flow, it may indicate a plug in the sample
system. Refer also to “Detecting a Plug in the Sample System” in this chapter.
Unplug the lines if necessary.

Also, check the Cell Pressure Low Scale/High Scale parameters. Compare the
readings to the value listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document and adjust the
scaling parameters if necessary.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the top cover from the analyzer Enclo-
sure, and check the Pressure Transducer cable to ensure it is properly connected at
the Bench Controller board (J601). Inspect the cable for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

- Test the Cell Pressure Transducer for proper operation. Use a multimeter to mea-
sure the resistance of the pressure transmitter to test for an open circuit.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems with the boards.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the Pressure Transducer does not appear to be
operating properly – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Flow Sensor Signal Conditioning Circuit on the Bench Control-
ler board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-74 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Cell temperature low For systems without a Measuring Cell Heater installed, this status indicates that the
Cell temperature is 5 Celsius degrees below the nominal Cell temperature.

For systems with a Measuring Cell Heater installed, this status indicates that the Cell
temperature is 3 Celsius degrees below the Cell temperature control setpoint.

Trigger Condition:

• This status condition may be triggered upon analyzer power-up while the Cell is
warming up to its operating temperature control setpoint, but will clear after the Cell
has properly warmed up to its normal operating temperature.

• Nominal Cell Temperature has not been entered or is incorrect.

• For systems with a Measuring Cell Heater, the Cell temperature Setpoint has not
been entered or is incorrect.

• Excessive heat loss from Measuring Cell cabinet (Analyzer Enclosure).

• Problem with the Cell Temperature Sensor cable or heater (systems with a Measur-
ing Cell heater is installed).

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- For systems without a Measuring Cell Heater:


 CONFIGUV
AnalysisSample Cell
From the HOME screen, check the real-time CellT reading. Then, view the
Sample Cell Conditions screen and check the Nominal Cell Temperature value
to verify if the CellT temperature reading is 5 Celsius degrees below the Nominal
Conditions
Cell Temperature.

Also, compare the Nominal Cell Temperature value to the Cell Temp value
listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If the Nominal Cell Temperature is
different, change it to match the value on the “9900_CFG Report” document, or to
the normal temperature expected at installation.

- For systems with a Measuring Cell Heater:


 CONFIGTemperature
Control
From the HOME screen, check the real-time CellT reading. Then, view the Tem-
perature Control screen and check the Cell Setpoint temperature to verify if the
CellT temperature reading is 3 Celsius degrees below Cell Setpoint.

Also, compare the Cell Setpoint temperature to the Cell Temp Setpoint value
listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If the Cell Setpoint temperature is
different, change it to match the value on the “9900_CFG Report” document, or to
the normal temperature expected at installation.

• Ensure the Analyzer Enclosure cover is properly secured with its screws to stop
heat loss.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, and
check the Cell Temperature Sensor cable to ensure it is properly connected at the
Bench Controller board (J605). Inspect the cable for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

(Continued next page.)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-75


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Cell temperature low (Continued from previous page.)

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

- Test the Cell Temperature Sensor for proper operation. Use a multimeter to mea-
sure the resistance of the temperature sensor to test for an open circuit.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer and may clear any problems with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the Cell Temperature Sensor does not appear to
be operating properly – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Cell Temperature Sensor Signal Conditioning Circuit on the
Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-76 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench temperature low The Bench temperature is 3 Celsius degrees below the Bench temperature control
setpoint.

Trigger Condition:

• This status condition may be triggered upon analyzer power-up while the Bench
is warming up to its operating temperature control setpoint, but will clear after the
Bench has properly warmed up to its normal operating temperature.

• Problem with Bench Heater.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- If the analyzer has been operating under normal conditions, view the BenchT
 CONFIGTemperature
Control
reading (from the HOME screen). Then, view the Temperature Control screen
and check the Bench Setpoint temperature to verify if the BenchT temperature
reading is 3 Celsius degrees below Bench Setpoint.

Also, compare the Bench Setpoint temperature to the Bench Temp Setpoint
value listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If the Bench Setpoint tem-
perature is different, change it to match the value on the “9900_CFG Report”
document.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, and:

- Check the Bench Temperature Sensor to ensure it is properly connected at the


Bench Controller board (J603) and inspect the wiring for damage (cuts, nicks,
burn marks, etc.).

- Check the Bench Temperature Heater Circuit wiring to ensure it is properly con-
nected at the Bench Controller board (J604) and inspect it for damage (cuts,
nicks, burn marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

Notes:
- The PMT Block will have to be removed to access the Overtemp
Switch and Temperature Transmitter.
- Refer to the “Analyzer Internal Component Layout, All Options”
and “Optical Bench Heater, Overtemp Switch, and RTD Locations”
drawings in Appendix C for locations of Optical Bench Overtemp
Switch and Temperature Transmitter.

- Check the Optical Bench Overtemp Switch. If the plunger has popped out, press it
in to reset it.

Warning:
Disconnect the AC power before attempting to access or reset the
Overtemp Switch.

- Test the Bench Temperature Sensor and Heater for proper operation. Use a multi-
meter to measure the resistance of the Temperature Sensor and the Heater to test
for an open circuit.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer and may also clear any problems with the Bench Controller
board.

(Continued next page.)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-77


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench temperature low (Continued from previous page.)

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The Optical Bench Overtemp Switch, Temperature Sensor, or Heater (or their wir-
ing), appears damaged – order new parts.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board firmware, or a problem with the Bench
Temperature Sensor Signal Measurement Circuit or Bench Heater Control Circuit.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.
Bench board The Bench Controller board temperature is below 5 °C. The Bench Controller
temperature low board temperature is typically considered to be the air temperature within the analyzer
Enclosure in most cases.

Trigger Condition:

• Excessive heat loss from the analyzer Enclosure.

Corrective Action:

• Ensure the Analyzer Enclosure cover is closed and secured with its screws to stop
heat loss.

• Check the ambient temperature around the analyzer and adjust it if necessary.

6-78 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Cell temperature high For systems without a Measuring Cell Heater installed, this status indicates that the
Cell temperature is 5 Celsius degrees above the nominal Cell temperature.

For systems with a Measuring Cell Heater installed, this status indicates that the Cell
temperature is 3 Celsius degrees above the Cell temperature control setpoint.

Trigger Condition:

• Overheating inside the analyzer Enclosure.

• Problem with the Measuring Cell Heater (systems with a Measuring Cell Heater
only).

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Ensure the Analyzer Enclosure cover is closed and secured with its screws.

• From the HMI:

- For systems without the Measuring Cell Heater:


From the HOME screen, check the real-time CellT reading. Then, view the
 CONFIGUV
AnalysisSample Cell
Sample Cell Conditions screen and check the Nominal Cell Temperature value
to verify if the CellT temperature reading is 5 Celsius degrees above the Nominal
Cell Temperature.
Conditions
Also, compare the Nominal Cell Temperature value to the Cell Temp value
listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If the Nominal Cell Temperature is
different, change it to match the value on the “9900_CFG Report” document, or to
the normal temperature expected at installation.

- For systems with the Measuring Cell Heater:


From the HOME screen, check the real-time CellT reading. Then, view the Tem-
 CONFIGTemperature
Control
perature Control screen and check the Cell Setpoint temperature to verify if the
CellT temperature reading is 3 Celsius degrees above Cell Setpoint.

Also, compare the Cell Setpoint temperature to the Cell Temp Setpoint value
listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If the Cell Setpoint temperature is
different, change it to match the value on the “9900_CFG Report” document, or to
the normal temperature expected at installation.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, and
check the Cell Temperature Sensor cable to ensure it is properly connected at the
Bench Controller board (J605). Inspect the cable for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

- Test the Cell Temperature Sensor for proper operation. Use a multimeter to mea-
sure the resistance of the temperature sensor to test for an open circuit.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer and may clear any problems with the Bench Controller board.

(Continued next page.)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-79


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Cell temperature high (Continued from previous page.)

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the Cell Temperature Sensor does not appear to
be operating properly – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Cell Temperature Sensor Signal Measuring Circuit on the Bench
Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.
Bench temperature The Bench temperature is 3 Celsius degrees above the Bench temperature control
high setpoint.

Trigger Condition:

• Problem with Bench Heater.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• From the HMI:

- If the analyzer has been operating under normal conditions, view the BenchT
 CONFIGTemperature
Control
reading (from the HOME screen). Then, view the Temperature Control screen
and check the Bench Setpoint temperature to verify if the BenchT temperature
reading is 3 Celsius degrees above Bench Setpoint.

Also, compare the Bench Setpoint temperature to the Bench Temp Setpoint
value listed on the “9900_CFG Report” document. If the Bench Setpoint tem-
perature is different, change it to match the value on the “9900_CFG Report”
document.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, and:

- Check the Bench Temperature Sensor to ensure it is properly connected at the


Bench Controller board (J603) and inspect the wiring for damage (cuts, nicks,
burn marks, etc.).

- Check the Bench Temperature Heater Circuit wiring to ensure it is properly con-
nected at the Bench Controller board (J604) and inspect it for damage (cuts,
nicks, burn marks, etc.).

(Continued next page.)

6-80 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench temperature (Continued from previous page.)
high
• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

Notes:
- The PMT Block will have to be removed to access the Overtemp
Switch and Temperature Transmitter.
- Refer to the “Analyzer Internal Component Layout, All Options”
and “Optical Bench Heater, Overtemp Switch, and RTD Locations”
drawings in Appendix C for locations of Optical Bench Overtemp
Switch and Temperature Transmitter.

- Check the Optical Bench Overtemp Switch. If the plunger has popped out, press it
in to reset it.

Warning:
Disconnect the AC power before attempting to access or reset the
Overtemp Switch.

Allow the interior of the analyzer to cool down enough to ensure safe
handling of components within the Electronics Enclosure.

- Test the Bench Temperature Sensor and Heater for proper operation. Use a multi-
meter to measure the resistance of the Temperature Sensor and the Heater to test
for an open circuit.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer; this may also clear any problems with the Bench Controller
board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The Optical Bench Overtemp Switch, Temperature Sensor, or Heater (or their wir-
ing), appears damaged – order new parts.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board firmware, or a problem with the Bench
Temperature Sensor Signal Measurement Circuit or Bench Heater Control Circuit.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-81


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench board The Bench Controller board temperature is above 65 °C. The Bench Controller
temperature high board temperature is typically considered to be the air temperature within the analyzer
Enclosure in most cases.

Trigger Condition:

• Overheating inside the analyzer Enclosure.

Corrective Action:

• Check the ambient temperature around the analyzer and adjust it if necessary.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The Optical Bench Overtemp Switch, Temperature Sensor, or Heater (or their wir-
ing), appears damaged – order new parts.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board firmware, or a problem with the Bench
Temperature Sensor Signal Measurement Circuit or Bench Heater Control Circuit.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.
Cell temperature The Bench Controller board has detected a problem with the Measuring Cell
sensor error Temperature Sensor.

Trigger Condition:

• Cell Temperature Sensor may be disconnected or faulty.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, and
check the Cell Temperature Sensor cable to ensure it is properly connected at the
Bench Controller board (J605). Inspect the cable for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

- Test the Cell Temperature Sensor for a short or open circuit. Replace the Tem-
perature Sensor, if necessary.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer and may clear any problems with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The cable appears damaged or the Cell Temperature Sensor does not appear to
be operating properly – order a new part and replace it.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

6-82 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Status Code 3 Message Description / Trigger Condition / Corrective Action
Bench temperature The Bench Controller board has detected a problem with the Bench Temperature
sensor error Sensor.

Trigger Condition:

• Bench Temperature Sensor may be disconnected or faulty.

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Take appropriate safety precautions, remove the Analyzer Enclosure cover, and
check the Bench Temperature Sensor to ensure it is properly connected at the
Bench Controller board (J603) and inspect the wiring for damage (cuts, nicks, burn
marks, etc.).

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, power
down the analyzer, and:

- Test the Bench Temperature Sensor for proper operation.

After this check has been made, cycle the analyzer AC power back On; this will also
reset the analyzer and may clear any problems with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- The Bench Temperature Sensor or its wiring appears damaged – order new parts.

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board firmware.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.
Bench board The Bench Controller board has detected a problem with the Bench Controller
temperature sensor board temperature sensor.
error
Trigger Condition:

• Problem with the Bench Controller board.

Corrective Action:

• Check the ambient temperature around the analyzer and adjust it if necessary.

• Take appropriate safety precautions, isolate the analyzer sample system, and cycle
the analyzer AC power Off-On to reset the analyzer. This may clear any problems
with the Bench Controller board.

• Contact AMETEK if:

- Cycling the AC power Off-On does not reset the condition. This can indicate a
problem with the Bench Controller board firmware.

- You need to verify operation or to order replacement parts, or you require replace-
ment instructions.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting | 6-83


This page intentionally left blank.

6-84 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


SERVICE and PARTS

This chapter discusses how to receive technical support from AMETEK.


This chapter also lists the recommended spare parts to have on hand to
ensure all consumable and replaceable parts are replaced according to the
“Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule” in Chapter 6.

Technical Support
AMETEK Western Research is committed to providing you the best tech-
nical support in the industry. If you need service or application assistance,
contact your local or nearest AMETEK Service Centre or the AMETEK
factory at (403) 235-8400 or 1-800-661-9198 or contact your local AMETEK
Western Research representative. For office locations and contact infor-
mation, refer to the Offices page near the beginning of this manual, or
visit us at www.ametekpi.com.
Before contacting AMETEK with questions regarding the installation, op-
eration, maintenance, or troubleshooting of the analyzer, carefully review
the contents of this manual. If you are unable to find an explanation for
your problem in this manual, please gather the following information
prior to contacting AMETEK:
• Billing and shipping address, and telephone number.
• Model number.
• Serial number.
• Purchase order number.
• AMETEK part number for the specific component/part you are enquir-
ing about, if known.
• Detailed information about the problem(s), such as operating charac-
teristics, status conditions, etc.

 IMPORTANT
NOTE
Before returning parts or equipment, you must get a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number from your local or nearest AMETEK
Service Centre, or the factory. This will ensure your equipment is
serviced and returned to you in a prompt and efficient manner.

Service and Parts | 7-1


?? ANSWERS TO YOUR QUESTIONS ??
The choice is yours...
Whether by phone or in person, we can meet the needs required to keep your
analyzer running at peak performance. Our factories are located in Calgary,
Alberta and Newark, Delaware with a Sales & Service Centre in Houston, Texas.
Depending on the programs you select, we will have a factory-trained represen-
tative talking to you within minutes – 24 hours a day, 365 days a year or on-site
within 24 hours. We stock parts at all three locations.

MINUTES OR HOURS,
WE’RE THERE FOR YOU
ANYTIME / ANYWHERE

AMETEK SERVICE and AFTERMARKET SALES SUPPORT

• PRE-lNSTALLATlON INSPECTIONS • ASAP


To ensure you order the correct analyzer with the AMETEK SERVICE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM. AME-
options your operation requires, schedule a factory- TEK’s exclusive ASAP program lets you select a service
trained Service Engineer to inspect the proposed package from a menu of service options. ASAP options
analyzer location. The on-site charge for this visit can include 24 hour phone support, 24 hour on-site guar-
be deducted from the start-up charge if you select that antee, rapid parts shipment, and many more service
option. benefits. ASAP plans may be written to provide cover-
age for a single analyzer, or all of the AMETEK process
• START UPS analyzers at your facility.
Your decision to buy an AMETEK analyzer is greatly
appreciated. After the time and money spent on your • AFTERMARKET SALES
analyzer, wouldn’t you expect a fast and successful start Our Aftermarket Sales group will keep you supplied
up? We can ensure that will happen! Schedule us to be with the parts to maintain your analyzer to factory
there before you power up the system. We will guaran- specifications. This is also the group that will keep your
tee a satisfactory commissioning of your analyzer. analyzer current with upgrades and retrofits.

• WARRANTY VALIDATION • TECHNICAL SUPPORT


Upon start-up, we will validate your 1 year warranty. Just call AMETEK and a factory trained Service Engi-
AMETEK’s warranty policy covers all parts and on-site neer will be there to answer your questions. With over
time. Incurred costs will be the responsibility of the 200 years of combined field service experience, our
customer. engineers are available to provide operational support
or troubleshooting expertise.
• WARRANTY EXTENSIONS
AMETEK offers a 2 or 3 year warranty extension for • TRAINING
your analyzers. The warranty is identical to the original We will train your service technicians at our Technology
policy supplied with the analyzer. Contact AMETEK Transfer Centres located in Calgary, Newark, or at your
Service for more details. facility. Our TTCs have equipment similar to yours for
hands-on training. A diploma will be presented upon
• SPARE PARTS completion of the course.
These parts allow each customer to properly main-
tain their analyzers according to the recommended
Analyzer Preventive Maintenance Schedule (listed in
Chapter 6), to ensure optimal operations. PROCESS INSTRUMENTS
Canada: 1-800-661-9198 U.S.A.: 1-800-537-6044

7-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Recommended Preventive Maintenance Spare Parts
This section lists the recommended spare parts to have readily available
for the Model 9900 Analyzer.

IMPORTANT SPARE PARTS INFORMATION


 Spare Parts for your analyzer may vary from those included in this
NOTE
manual. This can be due to applications using optional equipment or
non-standard Measuring Cells.

Before ordering spare parts, check the “Supplemental Information”


folder of the analyzer Documentation Package (CD or hard copy,
shipped with the analyzer) for a Manual Supplement (which may
contain spare parts information) or a Custom Spare Parts list. If
included, use those part numbers; if not, use the part numbers in this
manual.

Service and Parts | 7-3


Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Preventive
Maintenance Spare Parts
AMETEK recommends having the following spare parts available to
ensure your analyzer will operate at peak efficiency. The replacement of
these parts is required as part of the “Analyzer Preventive Maintenance
Schedule” (Chapter 6). It is also necessary to have these parts on hand in
case the parts fail or become damaged or contaminated, and need to be
replaced.

For drawings that illustrate the location of all spare parts in the analyzer,
see “Changing Out Replaceable Parts” in Chapter 6.

 Refer to “Replacing the  Note 1: Source Lamp (Optical Bench) Spare Parts
In the event of natural degeneration, damage, or other failure of a
Source Lamps” in Chapter 6 NOTE
for information about replacing Source Lamp, AMETEK recommends changing out both Source
the lamps. Lamps to ensure optimal operation and to minimize additional costly
service and downtime.

Depending on the application (SO2 or H2S, or other species), order


only the appropriate type of Source Lamps. To verify the lamp type,
open the analyzer and check the label on the lamps. If the lamp type
is not listed in the “Optical Bench/Measuring Cell Spare Parts” list,
refer to an accompanying Manual Supplement or Custom Spare Parts
List for spare parts ordering numbers. These documents can be found
in the “Supplemental Information” folder of the analyzer Documenta-
tion Package CD shipped with the analyzer.

 Refer to “Measuring
Cell Preventive Maintenance”
 Note 2: Measuring Cell Spare Parts
The Measuring Cell parts (Cell Windows and o-rings) in the “Optical
NOTE
in Chapter 6 for information Bench/Measuring Cell Spare Parts” list in this chapter apply only to
about changing out parts in standard Measuring Cells (2.5 cm to 40 cm path lengths). If the Cell
the Measuring Cell.
is a different path length – or the application is for a non-standard –
refer to an accompanying Manual Supplement or Custom Spare Parts
List for spare parts ordering numbers. These documents can be found
in the “Supplemental Information” folder of the analyzer Documenta-
tion Package CD shipped with the analyzer.

7-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Optical Bench / Measuring Cell Spare Parts (120 VAC / 240 VAC)
Part No. Description 1-Year Qty 2-Year Qty

Notes: For lamp types not in this list, see Note 1, previous page.

SO2: Single-Species Analyzers Only / Dual Range


100-0688 Magnesium (Mg) Source Lamp 1 2
(Optical Bench, Lamp 1)
AND
300-8707 Copper (Cu) Source Lamp 1 2
(Optical Bench, Lamp 2)

SO2: Extra Low Range (<25 ppm)


301-2653 Zinc (Zn)/Silver (Ag) Source Lamp 1 2
(Optical Bench, Lamp 1)
AND
100-0688 Magnesium (Mg) Source Lamp 1 2
(Optical Bench, Lamp 2)

H2S: Single-Species Analyzers Only


300-2070 Cadmium (Cd) Source Lamp 2 4
(Optical Bench, Lamp 1, Lamp 2)

SO2 / NOx: Standard Range


100-0688 Magnesium (Mg) Source Lamp 1 2
(Optical Bench, Lamp 1)
AND
300-2070 Cadmium (Cd) Source Lamp 1 2
(Optical Bench, Lamp 2)

NO / NO2 / NOx: Low Range


100-2152 (Pre-tested Pair of Source Lamps): 1 2
Cadmium (Cd) Source Lamp (Lamp 1),
Magnesium (Mg) Source Lamp (Lamp 2)
(Optical Bench)

Cl2
300-8707 Copper (Cu) Source Lamp 2 4
(Optical Bench, Lamp 1, Lamp 2)

300-0281 Cell Window, Fused Silica, 1.5" Diameter 2 4


(Measuring Cell, 2.5 cm to 40 cm Path Length – Standard)
See Note 2, previous page.

100-2009 O-Ring, Size 125, Baked Aflas 6 12


(Measuring Cell, 2.5 cm to 40 cm Path Length – Standard)
See Note 2, previous page.

Multi-Species Analyzers Only


300-9437 Bearing, Filter Wheel 0 2
(Filter Wheel Assembly in Optical Bench Assembly)
(Multi-Species Analyzers Only)

Multi-Species Analyzers Only


301-1766 O-Ring, EPDM, Size 104 mm x 2.5 mm, Filter Wheel 1 2
(no substitutions allowed)
(Filter Motor Drive Belt in Optical Bench Assembly)
(Multi-Species Analyzers Only)

Service and Parts | 7-5


Other Spare Parts

Replacement Cables, Analyzer Enclosure


These cables apply to all Model 9900 Analyzers (120 VAC or 240 VAC), and
are required only in the event of failure or damage to a cable.

Certain cables are used only if the analyzer has been configured with cer-
tain optional equipment.

 If ordering cables without “Cable ‘#’” designators (i.e., cables that


come prewired to a component), contact AMETEK for information.
NOTE

Part No. Description Qty

301-1550 O2 Sensor Cable, Ribbon (to Bench Controller board), Cable 1 1


Type C, 16 Conductor, 12"
(Optional: Used only if optional O2 Sensor is installed.)

301-1559 Customer I/O Cable, Ribbon (to Bench Controller board), Cable 2 1
Type C, 16 Conductor, 24"

301-2107 PMT Supply Board Ribbon Cable (to Bench Controller board), Cable 3 1
1.27 MM, 34 Conductor, 14"

301-2196 Optical Sensor (Opto-Coupler) Cable (to Bench Controller board), Cable 4 1
(Optional: Used only if analyzer is Multi-Species.)

301-2204 Flow Sensor Cable (to Bench Controller board), Cable 5, 1


3 Conductor, 26 AWG c/w Connectors
(Optional: Used only if optional Flow Sensor is installed.)

301-2940 DB-9 Harness (HMI/Display Unit to Bench Controller board), Cable 6 1

301-2942 Ethernet Cable (HMI/Display Unit to Ethernet Cable on Rear Panel), Cable 7 1

301-3035 RS-485 Cable (Ethernet Module to Customer I/O board), Cable 8 1

301-2099 RS-485 Cable (Ethernet Module to Ethernet Cable on Rear Panel), Cable 9 1

301-2164 Lamp Socket Assembly (Source Lamps on Optical Bench to Bench Controller board) 1

Refer to the Analyzer Wiring Diagram (Sheets 1 and 2 ) in Chapter 3 for the interconnect locations of these cables.

7-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Spare Analyzer Fuses
AMETEK recommends having on-site the spare fuses used in the ana-
lyzer. These fuses do not need to be changed out at regular intervals, but
are necessary in the event that a replacement is required. Order only the
fuses used by your analyzer.

120 V
240 V
Description (Location*) Part No. Fuse Type Part No. Fuse Type

F1 300-9245 3.15 A/FST 300-9245 3.15 A/FST


FL1 Line 1 S/B 5x20mm S/B 5x20mm
Main Supply 250 VAC 250 VAC

F2 300-9245 3.15 A/FST 300-9245 3.15 A/FST


FL2 Line 2 S/B 5x20mm S/B 5x20mm
Main Supply 250 VAC 250 VAC

F3 300-6254 2.0 A/FST 300-9244 1.0 A/FST


DC Power S/B 5x20mm S/B 5x20mm
250 VAC 250 VAC

F4 300-9244 1.0 A/FST 300-6291 0.5 A/FST


Heater S/B 5x20mm S/B 5x20mm
250 VAC 250 VAC

F5 — — — —
Spare
* These fuses (F1, F2, F3, F4, F5) are located on the AC Power Distribution/MOV Board (100-2450) – see Appendix C. For
the location of this board, refer to the “Analyzer Internal Component Layout, All Options” diagram under “Installing the
Mechanical Components” in Chapter 3.

! Substitution of specified replacement components (fuses) is not per-


mitted.
WARNING

Disconnect power supply before replacing the fuses on the AC Power


Distribution/MOV board.

Service and Parts | 7-7


Optional Equipment, Spare Parts
These parts are required only if the equipment is installed, and only in the
event of a failure or damage to the equipment. Contact AMETEK Ser-
vice to verify operation, to order replacement parts, and for replacement
instructions.

Part No. Description Qty

100-2279 Optional Flow Sensor Kit, 0–5L/Min 1


or
100-2280 Optional Flow Sensor Kit, 0–10L/Min 1

100-2281 Optional Pressure Transducer, 0–30 PSIA 1


or
100-2282 Optional Pressure Transducer, 0–100 PSIA 1

100-2465 Optional O2 Paramagnetic Sensor Kit 1

100-2436 Optional Cell Temperature Sensor 1

For the location of these parts in the analyzer, refer to the “Analyzer Internal Component Layout, All Options” diagram
under “Installing the Mechanical Components” in Chapter 3.

Replacement Printed Circuit Boards


These boards apply to all Model 9900 Analyzers (120 VAC or 240 VAC),
 Contact AMETEK
Service to verify proper
and are required only in the event of failure or damage to a board.
board operation, to order
replacement parts, and for  * Optional boards are required only if the analyzer has been config-
replacement instructions. ured for the associated optional function.
NOTE

Board Replacement Part Numbers

Part No. Description Qty

100-2380 Bench Controller board 1

100-2481 Customer I/O Board 1

100-2226 PMT Supply Board 1

100-2227 PMT Signal Board 1

100-2450 AC Power Distribution/MOV Board 1

100-2235 Ground Board 1

For the location of these boards in the analyzer, refer to the “Analyzer Internal Component Layout, All Options” diagram
under “Installing the Mechanical Components” in Chapter 3.

7-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Miscellaneous Spare Parts
These parts are required only in the event of a failure or damage to the
parts. Contact AMETEK Service to verify operation, to order replacement
parts, and for replacement instructions.

Part No. Description Qty

301-3079 * USB Flash Drive, 1GB 1

Multi-Species Analyzers (Motorized Optical Bench Version) Only


100-2461 ** Filter Wheel Motor, 24 VDC, Brushless (Optical Bench Assembly) 1
1 required approximately every 3 years

* Required only in the event of failure or damage (or if lost).


** For Motor location, see the Lamp Maintenance Diagram under “Installing the Mechanical Components” in Chapter 3.

Ordering a Hard Copy of the Analyzer User Manual


The standard analyzer User Manual and its supporting documentation is
in electronic format (PDF) on a CD shipped with the analyzer. To order a
hard copy of the User Manual and the entire Documentation Package, use
the Part Number below:

Part No. Description Qty


903-8726 Model 9900RM (Rack Mount) Analyzer User Manual 1

Service and Parts | 7-9


This page intentionally left blank.

7-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


GLOSSARY OF TERMS

This chapter contains definitions of abbreviations and terms that can be


seen while working from the Human-Machine Interface (HMI), and oth-
ers that are used throughout this manual. \

Term/Abbreviation Full Term / Description


A/D analog-to-digital
ADC analog-to-digital converter
ALC Automatic Lamp Control

Customer I/O board (or CIO)


Customer Input/Output board

D/A digital-to-analog
DAS Data Acquisition System
DCS Distributed Control System
DP differential pressure

HMI Human-Machine Interface


HV high voltage

Key filter The filter with maximum attenuation.

Motor Filter Wheel Motor, used to rotate Filter Wheel (multi-species analyzers only).
Motorized Filter Analyzer, or Motorized Optical Bench
Refers to Model 9900 Analyzers that measure multiple species, therefore requir-
ing a motorized filter wheel (or, motorized Optical Bench).
Motorless Filter Analyzer, or Motorless Optical Bench
Refers to Model 9900 Analyzers that measure a single species, therefore requir-
ing a fixed filter (a Filter Wheel is not used; therefore a motor is not required).
Multiple Species Analyzer (or Version)
See Motorized Filter Analyzer.

Glossary of Terms | 8-1


Term/Abbreviation Full Term
NV memory nonvolatile memory

Opto-interruptor Optical Sensor (in the Optical Bench)

PLC Programmable Logic Controller


PMT photomultiplier tube

RPM revolutions per minute (RPM)

SD SD Memory Card
Single Species Analyzer (or Version)
See Motorless Filter Analyzer.
SO2 SO2 Low Range (when low and high range SO2 are being measured; or when
standard range SO2 is being measured)
SO2:HR SO2 High Range
SSR solid state relay

T-H (Track-Hold) This is the Hold Time (sec) for which the concentration value for
each species will be held constant while a zero or span calibration is being per-
formed on the analyzer.

UHP Ultra High Purity


USB Universal Serial Bus

Wheel Filter Wheel (multi-species analyzers only)

8-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


APPENDIX A – OPTIONS

This Appendix is reserved for optional equipment. For systems with op-
tional equipment, some information about certain options is included in
the main body of this manual, or in Manual Supplements that can be found
in the “Supplemental Information” folder of the Analyzer Documentation
Package CD, or in the Supplemental Information section of this manual.
Additional information about optional equipment will be included here.

Paramagnetic O2 Sensor Concentration Measurement


The O2 concentration is measured using a Paramagnetic O2 Sensor in-
stalled in the Analyzer Enclosure (Figure A-1). The O2 concentration value
can be set up to be displayed simultaneously with the other concentra-
tions on the home screen. The O2 Sensor manual (Pm1158 Oxygen Trans-
ducer Instruction Manual) accompanies this manual when this option is
installed at the factory. For internal component layout options, see Figures
A-2 and A-3.

 Reducing the sample flow rate may reduce excessive noise on the out-
put signal when the paramagnetic O2 Sensor is used.
NOTE

Figure A-1.
Paramagnetic O2 Sensor
diagram.

Appendix A – Options | A-1


Figure A-2.
Optional O2 Sensor, Layout, with
“Standard” Measuring Cell.

 This layout applies only to analyzers that use an optional O2 Sen-


NOTE
sor with a “Standard” Measuring Cell. Standard Cells are generally
2.5 cm to 40 cm path length Measuring Cells.

A-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Figure A-3.
Optional O2 Sensor,
Layout, with White Cell.

 This layout applies only to analyzers that use an optional O2 Sensor


with a White Cell.
NOTE

Appendix A – Options | A-3


This page intentionally left blank.

A-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


APPENDIX B – MODBUS® REGISTERS MAP

Overview

 Refer to Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 for instructions on enabling, dis-


abling, and configuring each Modbus communication interface.
NOTE

The UV9000 is the core analysis subsystem of a Series-9900 Analyzer sys-


tem. The UV9000 analysis subsystem can communicate with other devices
or systems using the Modbus-RTU serial protocol on two built-in RS-485
ports. The UV9000 subsystem acts as a Modbus slave device on both ports
with the default address of 101. Both ports are isolated and support 4-wire
and 2-wire systems.

One RS-485 port (RS-485:1), accessed via J501 of the UV9000 Bench Con-
troller board (100-2380), is reserved for communicating with the HMI. The
UV Bench-HMI communication link operates at 38.4 kbps, 8 data bits, 1
stop bit, and no parity. The HMI can be integrated in a Series-9900 Ana-
lyzer system or be located remotely.

The second RS-485 port (RS-485:2) can be accessed either at J502 of the
UV9000 Bench Controller board or at TB1 of the Customer I/O board
(100-2380). The port is available to communicate with a Modbus master
device (e.g., PLC and PC), or through the customer communication sys-
tem (e.g., DCS). The default communication settings are 38.4 kbps, 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-1


Changing Communication Settings
The baud rate, number of stop bits, and parity of the RS-485:2 port can
be changed via Modbus communication from either the HMI or a mas-
ter device. The slave address, common to both RS-485 ports, can also be
changed from the HMI. If the slave address is changed, the communica-
tion setup of the HMI must be changed to match via the HMI’s off-line
menu.

To make the change to the communication settings to take effect, the


change is required to be saved to the UV9000’s on-board non-volatile
memory and the UV9000 subsystem is reset.

Modbus Registers
Refer to the section “Analyzer Modbus Register Map” for the definitions
and descriptions of the Modbus registers available on the UV9000 analysis
subsystem. There are 439 data items that are grouped into categories:
• Analysis data (live UV concentration results)
• Photometric measurement data (absorbances and transmittances)
• Sensor measurement data (temperature, pressure, flow rate and O2
measurement results)
• Calibration status, command, configuration and results
• UV bench setup status, command, configuration and results
• UV bench operations configuration and diagnostic
• System identification and operations command and status
• Communication configuration
• Temperature control status and configuration
• Sensor measurement configuration
• Customer input/output state and configuration
• Analysis operations and configuration
• Track-hold analysis data (concentration results) and configuration

Result and status registers have read-only access; configuration and most
command registers are read-write accessible. Result and status register
values are updated once per second.

Floating point values in IEEE single-precision format and 32-bit integer


values occupy two standard 16-bit Modbus registers. Modicon convention
is used in formatting floating point and 32-bit integer values (i.e., the first
register holds the lower 16 bits and the second register holds the upper 16
bits).

B-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Modbus-TCP/Ethernet Support
Modbus-TCP/Ethernet support is provided in two ways. For full-function
access to the Modbus registers, a Modbus gateway is required to bridge
between the Modbus-RTU and the Modbus-TCP networks. The gateway
can be connected to the RS-485:2 port at the UV9000 Bench Controller
board or the Customer I/O board.

If full-function access to the Modbus registers is not required and the op-
tional HMI is installed as part of the analyzer system, Modbus-TCP/Ether-
net support with reduced functionality is provided via the HMI. Through
the HMI’s Ethernet port, all read-only registers and these command and
operation state registers are accessible:

• Calibration action initiation register (#82);

• Analysis sample source register (#320);

• Track-hold operation state register (#667).

With reduced functionality, analysis and measurement results and status


and diagnostic information are still fully available to the Modbus master
device; the Modbus master device can also initiate actions typically re-
quired of the analyzer system. However, the result, status, and diagnostic
register values are only updated once every two seconds.

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-3


Analyzer Modbus Register Map
The Modbus register map defined below applies to both Modbus commu-
nication interfaces (RTU on RS-485 and TCP on Ethernet) on the analyzer.

REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
1 UV Species1 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is low-range SO2.
3 UV Species2 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is NO2.
5 UV Species3 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is NO.
7 UV Species4 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is high-range SO2.
9 UV Species5 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is extended-range SO2.
11 UV Species6 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is H2S.
13 UV Species7 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is NDr2.
15 UV Species8 concentration * FLOAT RO
Note: Standard UV species is NDr1.
17 Aggregated UV species concentration * FLOAT RO
Note:
1) When NOx measurement is enabled in the Algorithm bitmask (REG#321.b3),
the aggregated UV species is NOx, which is the sum of UV Species2 (NO2) and
Species3 (NO) concentrations.
2) When NOx measurement is not enabled in the Algorithm bitmask, the UV species
to be aggregated is defined by the Aggregated UV species inclusion bitmask
(REG#761) and the Species Factors (REG#802-816).
19 Lamp1-Filter1 absorbance - FLOAT RO
21 Lamp1-Filter2 absorbance - FLOAT RO
23 Lamp1-Filter3 absorbance - FLOAT RO
25 Lamp1-Filter4 absorbance - FLOAT RO
27 Lamp1-Filter5 absorbance - FLOAT RO
29 Lamp1-Filter6 absorbance - FLOAT RO
31 Lamp2-Filter1 absorbance - FLOAT RO
33 Lamp2-Filter2 absorbance - FLOAT RO
35 Lamp2-Filter3 absorbance - FLOAT RO
37 Lamp2-Filter4 absorbance - FLOAT RO
39 Lamp2-Filter5 absorbance - FLOAT RO
41 Lamp2-Filter6 absorbance - FLOAT RO
43 Lamp1-Filter1 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp1-Filter1 zero-transmittance.
45 Lamp1-Filter2 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp1-Filter2 zero-transmittance.
47 Lamp1-Filter3 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp1-Filter3 zero-transmittance.
49 Lamp1-Filter4 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp1-Filter4 zero-transmittance.
51 Lamp1-Filter5 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp1-Filter5 zero-transmittance.
53 Lamp1-Filter6 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp1-Filter6 zero-transmittance.

B-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
55 Lamp2-Filter1 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp2-Filter1 zero-transmittance.
57 Lamp2-Filter2 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp2-Filter2 zero-transmittance.
59 Lamp2-Filter3 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp2-Filter3 zero-transmittance.
61 Lamp2-Filter4 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp2-Filter4 zero-transmittance.
63 Lamp2-Filter5 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp2-Filter5 zero-transmittance.
65 Lamp2-Filter6 transmittance - FLOAT RO
Note: Normalized to Lamp2-Filter6 zero-transmittance.
67 Bench controller board temperature °C FLOAT RO
69 Bench temperature °C FLOAT RO
71 Cell temperature °C FLOAT RO
73 Cell pressure mmHg FLOAT RO
Note: Valid if AMETEK ACT or DCT sample cell pressure transducer is installed and
enabled.
75 Flow rate L/min FLOAT RO
Note: Valid if Omron MEM gas flow sensor is installed and enabled.
77 O2 concentration % FLOAT RO
Note: Valid if a dry application O2 sensor (i.e., Hummingbird Pm1158, Figaro KE-25,
or Hummingbird Paracube-Delta) is installed and enabled.
79 O2 sensor temperature °C FLOAT RO
Note: Valid if Hummingbird Pm1158 O2 sensor installed and enabled.
81 Calibration completion countdown sec UINT16 RO
82 Calibration action initiation and current state - UINT16 RW
0 = abort \ idle
10 = manual zero UV
11 = manual span UV Species1
12 = manual span UV Species2
13 = manual span UV Species3
14 = manual span UV Species4
15 = manual span UV Species5
16 = manual span UV Species6
17 = manual span UV Species7
18 = reserved
19 = manual span Aggregated UV species
20 = manual zero O2
21 = manual span O2
30 = manual zero UV and O2
40 = auto-CAL0
41 = auto-CAL1
42 = auto-CAL2
43 = auto-CAL3
44 = auto-CAL4
45 = full auto-CAL sequence
Note: When zero-calibrating both the UV species and the O2 sensor at the same
time, a zero-calibration gas with no oxygen content (e.g., N2) must be used.
Auto-CAL action commands are not applicable.
83 Calibration data averaging duration sec UINT16 RW
84 UV Species1 span concentration * FLOAT RW
86 UV Species2 span concentration * FLOAT RW
88 UV Species3 span concentration * FLOAT RW
90 UV Species4 span concentration * FLOAT RW
92 UV Species5 span concentration * FLOAT RW
94 UV Species6 span concentration * FLOAT RW
96 UV Species7 span concentration * FLOAT RW

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-5


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
98 Reserved * FLOAT RW
100 Aggregated UV species span concentration * FLOAT RW
Note: Applicable to NOx measurement only.
102 UV Species1 span factor - FLOAT RW
104 UV Species2 span factor - FLOAT RW
106 UV Species3 span factor - FLOAT RW
108 UV Species4 span factor - FLOAT RW
110 UV Species5 span factor - FLOAT RW
112 UV Species6 span factor - FLOAT RW
114 UV Species7 span factor - FLOAT RW
116 Reserved - FLOAT RW
118 Lamp1-Filter1 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
120 Lamp1-Filter2 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
122 Lamp1-Filter3 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
124 Lamp1-Filter4 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
126 Lamp1-Filter5 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
128 Lamp1-Filter6 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
130 Lamp2-Filter1 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
132 Lamp2-Filter2 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
134 Lamp2-Filter3 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
136 Lamp2-Filter4 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
138 Lamp2-Filter5 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
140 Lamp2-Filter6 zero-transmittance - FLOAT RW
142 O2 span concentration % FLOAT RW
144 O2 zero offset % FLOAT RW
146 O2 span factor - FLOAT RW
148 Bench auto setup progress - UINT16 RO
0 = idle
1…8 = step1…8
65535 (0xFFFF) = aborting
149 Bench auto setup command - UINT16 WO
0 = abort
1 = start
Note: Once started, repeated start commands are ignored and do not restart the
process.
150 Bench auto setup target PMT signal level mV UINT16 RW
Note: As observed at TP2 and TP5 on PMT Signal Board.
Range = 0 to 10000 corresponding to 0.000V to 10.000V.
151 Bench auto setup maximum lamp pulse current mA x1000 UINT16 RW
Note: Range = 0 to 14000 corresponding to 0.000mA to 14.000mA.
152 Lamp1 base current setpoint (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
153 Lamp2 base current setpoint (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
154 Lamp1-Filter1 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
155 Lamp1-Filter2 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
156 Lamp1-Filter3 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
157 Lamp1-Filter4 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
158 Lamp1-Filter5 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
159 Lamp1-Filter6 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
160 Lamp2-Filter1 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
161 Lamp2-Filter2 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
162 Lamp2-Filter3 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW

B-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
163 Lamp2-Filter4 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
164 Lamp2-Filter5 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
165 Lamp2-Filter6 pulse current (See Note in REG#151) mA x1000 UINT16 RW
166 Measure-PMT HV V x10 UINT16 RW
Note: Range = 3000 to 8000 corresponding to 300.0V to 800.0V.
167 Reference-PMT HV V x10 UINT16 RW
Note: Range = 3000 to 8000 corresponding to 300.0V to 800.0V.
168 Bench auto-level control (ALC) - UINT16 RW
0 = disable
1 = enable
169 Lamp1-Filter1 measure-PMT signal level mV UINT16 RO
Note: Range = 0 to 10000 corresponding to 0.000V to 10.000V as observed at TP2
and TP5 on PMT Signal Board.
170 Lamp1-Filter2 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
171 Lamp1-Filter3 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
172 Lamp1-Filter4 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
173 Lamp1-Filter5 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
174 Lamp1-Filter6 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
175 Lamp2-Filter1 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
176 Lamp2-Filter2 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
177 Lamp2-Filter3 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
178 Lamp2-Filter4 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
179 Lamp2-Filter5 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
180 Lamp2-Filter6 measure-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
181 Lamp1-Filter1 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
182 Lamp1-Filter2 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
183 Lamp1-Filter3 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
184 Lamp1-Filter4 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
185 Lamp1-Filter5 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
186 Lamp1-Filter6 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
187 Lamp2-Filter1 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
188 Lamp2-Filter2 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
189 Lamp2-Filter3 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
190 Lamp2-Filter4 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
191 Lamp2-Filter5 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
192 Lamp2-Filter6 reference-PMT signal level (See Note in REG#169) mV UINT16 RO
193 Measure-PMT HV measurement V x10 UINT16 RO
Note: Range = 3000 to 8000 corresponding to 300.0V to 800.0V as observed at
-HV1 and -HV2 on PMT Supply Board.
194 Reference-PMT HV measurement (See Note in REG#193) V x10 UINT16 RO
195 Lamp1 base HV measurement V x10 UINT16 RO
Note: Range = 0 to 5500 corresponding to 0.0V to 550.0V.
196 Lamp2 base HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
197 Lamp1-Filter1 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
198 Lamp1-Filter2 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
199 Lamp1-Filter3 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
200 Lamp1-Filter4 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
201 Lamp1-Filter5 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
202 Lamp1-Filter6 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
203 Lamp2-Filter1 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
204 Lamp2-Filter2 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-7


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
205 Lamp2-Filter3 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
206 Lamp2-Filter4 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
207 Lamp2-Filter5 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
208 Lamp2-Filter6 pulse HV measurement (See Note in REG#195) V x10 UINT16 RO
209 Lamp1 base current measurement mA x1000 UINT16 RO
Note: Range = 0 to 14000 corresponding to 0.000mA to 14.000mA.
210 Lamp2 base current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
211 Lamp1-Filter1 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
212 Lamp1-Filter2 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
213 Lamp1-Filter3 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
214 Lamp1-Filter4 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
215 Lamp1-Filter5 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
216 Lamp1-Filter6 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
217 Lamp2-Filter1 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
218 Lamp2-Filter2 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
219 Lamp2-Filter3 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
220 Lamp2-Filter4 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
221 Lamp2-Filter5 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
222 Lamp2-Filter6 pulse current measurement (See Note in REG#209) mA x1000 UINT16 RO
223 Motor speed RPM x10 UINT16 RO
Note: Valid if bench type (REG#229) is motorized.
224 Filter wheel speed (See Note in REG#23) RPM x10 UINT16 RO
225 Analysis subsystem model ID - UINT16 RO
Note: UV9900 model ID is 101.
226 Firmware version - major - UINT16 RO
227 Firmware version - minor - UINT16 RO
228 Firmware version - build - UINT16 RO
229 Bench type - UINT16 RO
0 = motorized
1 = motorless
230 Wavelength valid bitmask - UINT16 RO
(0 = valid; 1 = invalid)
b0...b5 = Lamp1-Filter1…Lamp1-Filter6
b6…b11 = Lamp2-Filter1…Lamp2-Filter6
b12…b15 = reserved
Note: Wavelength valid bitmask is derived from the analysis matrix.
231 UV Species valid bitmask - UINT16 RO
(0 = valid; 1 = invalid)
b0...b7 = UV Species1…8
b8 = Aggregated UV result (Species2+Species3)
b9…b15 = reserved
Note: UV species valid bitmask is derived from the analysis matrix and the algorithm
bitmask.
232 Serial number text[1...2] - CHAR RO \ RW
Notes:
1) Layout of ASCII character registers:
high byte = 1st character
low byte = 2nd character
2) Serial number text registers are normally RO but can be changed to RW using
the “enable change to factory system settings” system operations command.
233 Serial number text[3...4] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
234 Serial number text[5...6] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
235 Serial number text[7...8] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW

B-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
236 Serial number text[9...10] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
237 Serial number text[11...12] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
238 Serial number text[13...14] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
239 Serial number text[15...16] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
240 Serial number text[17...18] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
241 Serial number text[19…20] (See Notes in REG#232) - CHAR RO \ RW
242 System command and state - UINT16 RW
0 = normal state \ command completed
1 = save current configuration to nonvolatile memory
2 = restore saved configuration from nonvolatile memory
3 = enable change to factory settings
666 = initiate soft-reset
Notes:
1) Only one command can be requested at a time.
2) While a command is in progress, further command requests are ignored.
3) Once an action command starts, it cannot be stopped.
4) Factory settings include serial number (REG#232-241) and system hardware
presence bitmask (REG#248.b8-b15).
243 System runtime sec UINT32 RO
245 System StatusCode1 bitmask - UINT16 RO
(0=false; 1=true)
b0 = motor speed out of range
b1 = filter wheel speed out of range
b2 = motor pulse not detected
b3 = filter wheel timing mark not detected
b4…b7 = reserved
b8 = lamp1 HV error
b9 = lamp2 HV error
b10 = lamp1 current error
b11 = lamp2 current error
b12 = PMT HV range error
b13 = PMT data range error
b14 = PMT data reception error
b15 = PMT data not received
246 System StatusCode2 bitmask - UINT16 RO
(0=false; 1=true)
b0 = ALC high error
b1 = ALC low error
b2 = ALC setpoint error
b3 = bench setup error
b4…b7 = reserved
b8 = analog output channel-A out of range or invalid assignment
b9 = analog output channel-B out of range or invalid assignment
b10 = analog output channel-C out of range or invalid assignment
b11 = analog output channel-D out of range or invalid assignment
b12 = analog output initialization failure
b13 = reserved
b14 = excessive span-drift
b15 = excessive zero-drift

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-9


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
247 System Status Code3 bitmask - UINT16 RO
(0=false; 1=true)
b0 = bench controller board temperature sensor error
b1 = bench temperature sensor error
b2 = cell temperature sensor error
b3 = bench controller board temperature high
b4 = bench temperature high
b5 = cell temperature high
b6 = bench controller board temperature low
b7 = bench temperature low
b8 = cell temperature low
b9 = cell pressure range error
b10 = flow rate range error
b11 = O2 sensor error
b12 = over heater temperature sensor error
b13..b14 = reserved
b15‡ = HMI-bench communication failure
‡ b15 indicates HMI-bench communication failure only when ModbusTCP commu-

nication with the analyzer is made to the HMI’s Ethernet port. When the status bit
is raised, all other status bits in StatusCode1 (REG#245), StatusCode2 (REG#246)
and StatusCode3 (REG#247) are undertermined.
248 System hardware presence bitmask - UINT16 RO/RW
b0: cell temperature sensor type
0 = PNP sensor selected; 1 = RTD probe selected
b1: customer IO board
0 = board not detected; 1 = board detected
b2: sample system interface board
0 = board not detected; 1 = board detected
b3…b7 = reserved
b8: sample conditioning columns
0 = not installed; 1 = installed
b9: oven heater RTD
0 = not installed; 1 = installed
b10...b11: O2 sensor type
0 = Hummingbird Pm1158
1 = Figaro KE-25
2 = Hummingbird Paracube-Delta
3 = reserved
b12…b14 = reserved
b15: without UV bench
0 = false; 1 = true
Note: 1) Lower 8 bits are read-only as the presence of the corresponding hardware
is detectable by the analyzer firmware.
2) Upper 8 bits are read-\write-able to inform the analyzer firmware of the corre-
sponding hardware being installed.
3) Only O2 sensor types ‘0’ and ‘1’ are currently available.
4) Bits 8-9 and 12-14 are not applicable.
249 Modbus slave node address - UINT8 RW
Note: Default for node address for UV9900 is 101.
250 DCS Modbus port baud rate - UINT8 RW
0 = 38400 (default setting)
1 = 19200
2 = 9600
3 = 4800
Note:
Change to DCS Modbus port baud rate, parity or stop bits takes effect on next reset.
(DCS Modbus port is J502 of Bench Controller board or TB1 of Customer I/O board.)
251 DCS Modbus port parity - UINT8 RW
0 = none (default setting)
1 = odd
2 = even

B-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
252 DCS Modbus port stop bits - UINT8 RW
1 = 1 stop bit (default setting)
2 = 2 stop bits
253 Bench heater duty cycle % UINT16 RO
Note: Valid if bench temperature control enabled.
254 Cell or, if enabled, column heater duty cycle % UINT16 RO
Note: Valid if cell temperature control enabled.
255 Bench temperature control setpoint °C FLOAT RW
Note: Setting the setpoint to 0°C disables the temperature control.
257 Cell temperature control setpoint °C FLOAT RW
259 Bench temperature control proportional band - Kp °C FLOAT RW
261 Cell temperature control proportional band - Kp °C FLOAT RW
263 Bench temperature control integral time constant - Ti sec FLOAT RW
265 Cell temperature control integral time constant - Ti sec FLOAT RW
267 Cell pressure transducer measurement low-scale mmHg FLOAT RW
Note: Setting high-scale to ‘0’ disables cell pressure measurement.
269 Cell pressure transducer measurement high-scale mmHg FLOAT RW
Note: Setting high-scale to ‘0’ disables cell pressure measurement.
271 Flow sensor measurement low-scale L/min FLOAT RW
Note: Setting high-scale to ‘0’ disables flow sensor measurement.
273 Flow sensor measurement high-scale L/min FLOAT RW
Note: Setting high-scale to ‘0’ disables flow sensor measurement.
275 O2 sensor measurement low-scale % FLOAT RW
Note: Setting high-scale to ‘0’ disables O2 sensor measurement.
277 O2 sensor measurement high-scale % FLOAT RW
Note: Setting high-scale to ‘0’ disables O2 sensor measurement.
279 Current operation state bitmask of system contact input - UINT16 RO
(0 = open; 1 = closed)
b0 = contact input 1
b1 = contact input 2
b2 = contact input 3
b3 = contact input 4
b4...b15 = reserved
Notes:
1) Use of contact inputs 1 and 2 are user configurable.
2) Contact input 4 is used to select the activation direction of relay 2 (REG#280).
a) Contact 4 is open, relay 2 de-energizes for CAL.
b) Contact 4 is closed, relay 2 energizes for CAL.
3) Use of contact input 3 is reserved.

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-11


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
280 Current operation state bitmask of system relay output and general fault/warning - UINT16 RO
status
b0 = relay 1 (0 = de-energized; 1 = energized)
b1 = relay 2 (0 = de-energized; 1 = energized)
b2 = relay 3 (0 = de-energized; 1 = energized)
b3 = relay 4 (0 = de-energized; 1 = energized)
b4 = relay 5 (0 = de-energized; 1 = energized)
b5...b13 = reserved
b14 = warning status detected (0 = none detected; 1 = at least one warning de-
tected)
b15 = fault status detected (0 = none detected; 1 = at least one fault detected)
Note:
1) Each relay bit always indicates its current state.
2) Trigger conditions of relay 1 is user configurable. Refer to REG#283.
3) Relay 2 is dedicated to indicate CAL-In-Progress. It can operate as de-energized
to indicate CAL or energized to indicate CAL based on the state of contact input 4
(REG#279).
4) Relay 3 is dedicated to indicate Warning.
5) Relays 1 and 3 operate in fail-safe manner, i.e. energized to indicate Normal and
de-energized to indicate Fault and Warning, respectively.
6) Use of relays 4 and 5 are reserved.
281 Assignment of action initiated or state indicated by system contact input 1 - UINT16 RW
0 = none \ not used
10 = manual zero UV
11 = manual span UV Species1
12 = manual span UV Species2
13 = manual span UV Species3
14 = manual span UV Species4
15 = manual span UV Species5
16 = manual span UV Species6
17 = manual span UV Species7
18 = reserved
19 = manual span Aggregated UV species (NOx only)
20 = manual zero O2
21 = manual span O2
30 = manual zero UV and O2
40 = auto-CAL0
41 = auto-CAL1
42 = auto-CAL2
43 = auto-CAL3
44 = auto-CAL4
45 = full auto-CAL sequence
50 = bench setup
60 = CEM probe blowback
100 = sample source for analysis [refer to REG#320]
101 = T-H operation [refer to REG#667]
102 = clear all latched relays:
Note: Auto-CAL actions [40-45] and CEM probe blowback action [60] are not ap-
plicable.

B-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
282 Assignment of action initiated or state indicated by system contact input 2 - UINT16 RW
0 = none \ not used
10 = manual zero UV
11 = manual span UV Species1
12 = manual span UV Species2
13 = manual span UV Species3
14 = manual span UV Species4
15 = manual span UV Species5
16 = manual span UV Species6
17 = manual span UV Species7
18 = reserved
19 = manual span Aggregated UV species (NOx only)
20 = manual zero O2
21 = manual span O2
30 = manual zero UV and O2
40 = auto-CAL0
41 = auto-CAL1
42 = auto-CAL2
43 = auto-CAL3
44 = auto-CAL4
45 = full auto-CAL sequence
50 = bench setup
60 = CEM probe blowback
100 = sample source for analysis [refer to REG#320]
101 = T-H operation [refer to REG#667]
102 = clear all latched relays
Note: Auto-CAL actions [40-45] and CEM probe blowback action [60] are not ap-
plicable.
283 Bitmask of trigger conditions of system status relay 1 and actions when triggered - UINT16 RW
b0 = fault (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b1 = warning (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b2 = calibration in progress (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b3 = bench setup in progress (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b4 = process alarms invalid (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b5 = process alarm1 (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b6 = process alarm2 (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b7 = process alarm3 (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b8 = process alarm4 (0 = exclude; 1 = include)
b9...b13 = reserved
b14 = activation (0 = de-energize when triggered; 1 = energize when triggered)
b15 = latching (0 = non-latching when triggered; 1 = latching when triggered)
Note: Only b0 to b3 are applicable.
284 Bitmask to include StatusCode1 conditions in system status relay trigger - UINT16 RW
(0 = exclude; 1 = include)
285 Bitmask to include StatusCode2 conditions in system status relay trigger - UINT16 RW
(0 = exclude; 1 = include)
286 Bitmask to include StatusCode3 conditions in system status relay trigger - UINT16 RW
(0 = exclude; 1 = include)
287 Bitmask for designating StatusCode1 conditions as warning or fault - UINT16 RW
(0 = warning; 1 = fault)
288 Bitmask for designating StatusCode2 conditions as warning or fault - UINT16 RW
(0 = warning; 1 = fault)
289 Bitmask for designating StatusCode3 conditions as warning or fault - UINT16 RW
(0 = warning; 1 = fault)

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-13


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
290 Analog output calibration command and operation state - UINT16 RW
0 = normal operation \ stop calibration
1 = zero calibration
2 = span calibration
3 = 25%-span check
4 = 50%-span check
5 = 75%-span check
291 Analog output option bitmask (See Note in REG#290) - UINT16 RW
b0..b1:
0 = 0 - 5 V output
1 = 1 - 5 V output
2 = reserved
3 = reserved
b2: 1 = clamp to min\max output values; 0 = no clamping
b3..b15: reserved
292 Analog output channel-A assignment (See Note in REG#290) - UINT16 RW
0 = none
1,3,…,77,79 = Modbus REG# of analysis and measurement results
169,170,…,223,224 = Modbus REG# of bench diagnostic measurements
647,649,…,663,665 = Modbus REG# of T-H results
293 Analog output channel-B assignment (See Note in REG#290) - UINT16 RW
0 = none
1,3,…,77,79 = Modbus REG# of analysis and measurement results
169,170,…,223,224 = Modbus REG# of bench diagnostic measurements
647,649,…,663,665 = Modbus REG# of T-H results
294 Analog output channel-C assignment (See Note in REG#290) - UINT16 RW
0 = none
1,3,…,77,79 = Modbus REG# of analysis and measurement results
169,170,…,223,224 = Modbus REG# of bench diagnostic measurements
647,649,…,663,665 = Modbus REG# of T-H results
295 Analog output channel-D assignment (See Note in REG#290) - UINT16 RW
0 = none
1,3,…,77,79 = Modbus REG# of analysis and measurement results
169,170,…,223,224 = Modbus REG# of bench diagnostic measurements
647,649,…,663,665 = Modbus REG# of T-H results
296 Analog output channel-A low-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
298 Analog output channel-A high-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
300 Analog output channel-B low-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
302 Analog output channel-B high-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
304 Analog output channel-C low-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
306 Analog output channel-C high-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
308 Analog output channel-D low-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
310 Analog output channel-D high-scale (See Note in REG#290) * FLOAT RW
312 Analog output channel-A zero calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
313 Analog output channel-A full-span calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
314 Analog output channel-B zero calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
315 Analog output channel-B full-span calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
316 Analog output channel-C zero calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
317 Analog output channel-C full-span calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000

B-14 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
318 Analog output channel-D zero calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
319 Analog output channel-D full-span calibration reading (See Note in REG#290) mV \ mA UINT16 RW
x1000
320 Analysis sample source - UINT16 RW
0# = non-process stream or algorithm not affected by sample source
1 = process stream
Note: As certain compensation steps in the analysis algorithm (e.g., absorbance
offset and compressibility) are valid and applicable only if the gas sample in the
analysis cell comes from the process stream, this register allows the Modbus master
to inform the UV9900 system the source of the sample (i.e., from the process
stream, or from non-process stream such as backpurge air, or calibration cylinder, or
non-sampling condition such as isolated sample line or isolated sample probe).
321 Analysis algorithm bitmask - UINT16 RW
(0 = disable; 1 = enable)
b0 = neutral drift compensation
b1 = linearization1
b2 = linearization2
b3 = NOx measurement
b4 = SO2 dual-range blending
b5 = SO2 triple-range extension
b6 = SO2 crosstalk adjustment
b7 = MeSH correction
b8 = hot application
b9 = liquid measurement
b10...b14= reserved
b15 = zero ABS at every peak analysis cycle
Note: b15 is only applicable to analyzer firmware version with absorbance peak
analysis algorithm.
322 Cell T&P compensation bitmask - UINT16 RW
b0 = cell temperature compensation
0: static or pseudo-dynamic via Modbus master update
1: dynamic using integrated measurement
b1 = cell pressure compensation
0: static or pseudo-dynamic via Modbus master update
1: dynamic using integrated measurement
b2...b15= reserved
323 Nominal cell temperature °C FLOAT RW
Note: The nominal value is used in cell temperature static compensation and to
trigger cell temperature low/high status conditions when the cell temperature sensor
is not installed.
325 Nominal cell pressure mmHg FLOAT RW
Note: The nominal value is used in cell pressure static compensation and to trigger
cell pressure range status condition when the pressure sensor is not installed.
327 Cell length cm FLOAT RW
329 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
331 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
333 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
335 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
337 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
339 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
341 Linearization or interference compensation coefficient 1 - FLOAT RW
343 Absorbance offset for Lamp1-Filter1 - FLOAT RW
345 Absorbance offset for Lamp1-Filter2 - FLOAT RW
347 Absorbance offset for Lamp1-Filter3 - FLOAT RW
349 Absorbance offset for Lamp1-Filter4 - FLOAT RW
351 Absorbance offset for Lamp1-Filter5 - FLOAT RW

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-15


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
353 Absorbance offset for Lamp1-Filter6 - FLOAT RW
355 Absorbance offset for Lamp2-Filter1 - FLOAT RW
357 Absorbance offset for Lamp2-Filter2 - FLOAT RW
359 Absorbance offset for Lamp2-Filter3 - FLOAT RW
361 Absorbance offset for Lamp2-Filter4 - FLOAT RW
363 Absorbance offset for Lamp2-Filter5 - FLOAT RW
365 Absorbance offset for Lamp2-Filter6 - FLOAT RW
367 Compressibility correction factor - FLOAT RW
369 Dual-range SO2 blending alpha factor - FLOAT RW
371 Absorbance adaptive filter sigma value - FLOAT RW
373 Absorbance adaptive filter minimum gain value - FLOAT RW
375 Neutral drift adaptive filter sigma value - FLOAT RW
377 Neutral drift adaptive filter minimum gain value - FLOAT RW
379 Reserved - FLOAT RW
381 Reserved - FLOAT RW
383 UV Species1 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
385 UV Species1 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
387 UV Species1 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
389 UV Species1 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
391 UV Species1 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
393 UV Species1 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
395 UV Species1 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
397 UV Species1 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
399 UV Species1 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW
401 UV Species1 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
403 UV Species1 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
405 UV Species1 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
407 UV Species2 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
409 UV Species2 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
411 UV Species2 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
413 UV Species2 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
415 UV Species2 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
417 UV Species2 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
419 UV Species2 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
421 UV Species2 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
423 UV Species2 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW
425 UV Species2 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
427 UV Species2 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
429 UV Species2 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
431 UV Species3 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
433 UV Species3 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
435 UV Species3 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
437 UV Species3 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
439 UV Species3 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
441 UV Species3 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
443 UV Species3 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
445 UV Species3 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
447 UV Species3 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW

B-16 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
449 UV Species3 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
451 UV Species3 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
453 UV Species3 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
455 UV Species4 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
457 UV Species4 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
459 UV Species4 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
461 UV Species4 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
463 UV Species4 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
465 UV Species4 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
467 UV Species4 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
469 UV Species4 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
471 UV Species4 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW
473 UV Species4 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
475 UV Species4 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
477 UV Species4 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
479 UV Species5 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
481 UV Species5 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
483 UV Species5 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
485 UV Species5 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
487 UV Species5 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
489 UV Species5 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
491 UV Species5 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
493 UV Species5 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
495 UV Species5 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW
497 UV Species5 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
499 UV Species5 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
501 UV Species5 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
503 UV Species6 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
505 UV Species6 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
507 UV Species6 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
509 UV Species6 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
511 UV Species6 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
513 UV Species6 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
515 UV Species6 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
517 UV Species6 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
519 UV Species6 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW
521 UV Species6 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
523 UV Species6 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
525 UV Species6 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
527 UV Species7 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
529 UV Species7 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
531 UV Species7 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
533 UV Species7 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
535 UV Species7 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
537 UV Species7 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
539 UV Species7 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
541 UV Species7 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
543 UV Species7 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-17


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
545 UV Species7 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
547 UV Species7 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
549 UV Species7 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
551 UV Species8 matrix element 1 - FLOAT RW
553 UV Species8 matrix element 2 - FLOAT RW
555 UV Species8 matrix element 3 - FLOAT RW
557 UV Species8 matrix element 4 - FLOAT RW
559 UV Species8 matrix element 5 - FLOAT RW
561 UV Species8 matrix element 6 - FLOAT RW
563 UV Species8 matrix element 7 - FLOAT RW
565 UV Species8 matrix element 8 - FLOAT RW
567 UV Species8 matrix element 9 - FLOAT RW
569 UV Species8 matrix element 10 - FLOAT RW
571 UV Species8 matrix element 11 - FLOAT RW
573 UV Species8 matrix element 12 - FLOAT RW
575 UV Species1 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
577 UV Species2 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
579 UV Species3 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
581 UV Species4 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
583 UV Species5 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
585 UV Species6 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
587 UV Species8 unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
589 Reserved - FLOAT RW
591 Aggregated UV result unit conversion factor - FLOAT RW
593 UV Species1 name[1...2] - CHAR RW
Note: Layout of ASCII character registers:
high byte = 1st character
low byte = 2nd character
594 UV Species1 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
595 UV Species1 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
596 UV Species2 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
597 UV Species2 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
598 UV Species2 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
599 UV Species3 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
600 UV Species3 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
601 UV Species3 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
602 UV Species4 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
603 UV Species4 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
604 UV Species4 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
605 UV Species5 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
606 UV Species5 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
607 UV Species5 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
608 UV Species6 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
609 UV Species6 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
610 UV Species6 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
611 UV Species7 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
612 UV Species7 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
613 UV Species7 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
614 UV Species8 name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW

B-18 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
615 UV Species8 name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
616 UV Species8 name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
617 Aggregated UV result name[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
618 Aggregated UV result name[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
619 Aggregated UV result name[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
620 UV Species1 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
621 UV Species1 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
622 UV Species1 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
623 UV Species2 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
624 UV Species2 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
625 UV Species2 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
626 UV Species3 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
627 UV Species3 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
628 UV Species3 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
629 UV Species4 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
630 UV Species4 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
631 UV Species4 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
632 UV Species5 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
633 UV Species5 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
634 UV Species5 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
635 UV Species6 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
636 UV Species6 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
637 UV Species6 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
638 UV Species7 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
639 UV Species7 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
640 UV Species7 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
641 UV Species8 unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
642 UV Species8 unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
643 UV Species8 unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
644 Aggregated UV result unit[1...2] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
645 Aggregated UV result unit[3...4] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
646 Aggregated UV result unit[5...6] (See Note in REG#593) - CHAR RW
647 T-H UV Species1 concentration * FLOAT RO
649 T-H UV Species2 concentration * FLOAT RO
651 T-H UV Species3 concentration * FLOAT RO
653 T-H UV Species4 concentration * FLOAT RO
655 T-H UV Species5 concentration * FLOAT RO
657 T-H UV Species6 concentration * FLOAT RO
659 T-H UV Species7 concentration * FLOAT RO
661 T-H UV Species8 concentration * FLOAT RO
663 T-H UV Aggregated UV result * FLOAT RO
665 T-H O2 concentration % FLOAT RO

Appendix B – Modbus® Registers Map | B-19


REG# Data
(40nnn) Description \ Definition Unit Type Access
667 T-H operation command - UINT16 RW
0 --> 1 = start holding
1 --> 0 = stop holding
Notes:
1) The “0 --> 1” command transition initiates the holding of concentration results.
2) If the hold time for a species is “0”, the corresponding concentration result is held
until the “1 --> 0” command transition.
3) If the hold time for a species has a positive value, the result is held for the time
specified and returns to tracking when the time expires, unless at the end of the
specified hold time, the command is still “1”. In that case, the hold continues until the
“1 --> 0” command transition.
668 Hold time for UV Species1 concentration sec UINT16 RW
669 Hold time for UV Species2 concentration sec UINT16 RW
670 Hold time for UV Species3 concentration sec UINT16 RW
671 Hold time for UV Species4 concentration sec UINT16 RW
672 Hold time for UV Species5 concentration sec UINT16 RW
673 Hold time for UV Species6 concentration sec UINT16 RW
674 Hold time for UV Species7 concentration sec UINT16 RW
675 Hold time for UV Species8 concentration sec UINT16 RW
676 Hold time for Aggregated UV result sec UINT16 RW
677 Hold time for O2 concentration sec UINT16 RW

B-20 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


APPENDIX C – DRAWINGS, BOARD LEDS
(STATES), AND TEST POINTS

This Appendix includes most of the drawings that are included in the
main body of this manual, plus additional drawings not included in the
main body.

 If applicable, drawings that are job-specific to your application are


located in the “Supplemental Information” folder of the Model 9900
NOTE
Analyzer Documentation Package CD shipped with the analyzer

Appendix C – Drawings, Board LEDs (States), and Test Points | C-1


Bench Controller Board (100-2380)

C-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Bench Controller Board LEDs: Descriptions and
Current States
LED
Designator Operation Description When LED=ON When LED=OFF
Show status of 24 VDC power supply
D104 Power is good Power is not good
to the board
Show overall firmware operation
D401 Pulse one second ON, one second OFF
status
Show data processing and Fast flashing when processing data and communicating with
D402
communication status HMI and DCS\PLC\PC
D601 Show bench heater duty cycle Heater energized Heater de-energized
D602 Show cell heater duty cycle Heater energized Heater de-energized

Bench Controller Board Test Points


Parameter Test Point Value
Board Supply Voltage J101-1 24±1 V
Voltage Indicator Window D104 22.8 V to 25.2 V (24 V ±5 %)
Other Supply Voltages TP101 11.0 V to 11.4 V
TP102 5.9 V to 6.1 V
TP103 3.2 V to 3.4 V
TP104 3.2 V to 3.4 V
TP317 4.9 V to 5.1 V
TP318 -4.5 V to -5.5 V
Lamp Voltage TP201 350±10 V, J201 disconnected
Lamp Current1 TP202, TP205 0.03 mA to 14 mApeak
Transfer Ratio: 5.55 mA/V

TP203, TP204, TP206, TP207 Transfer Ratio: 5.55 mA/V


Lamp Voltage Monitoring Circuit1 TP208, TP209 Input Range: 0 to 400 V
Transfer Ratio: 140 V/V
PMT HV Control Voltage TP301, TP302 0 to 2.5 V
Transfer Function:
VPMT = -(800 V – 200 x VTP301,302)
PMT HV Monitor Voltage TP303, TP304 0 to -4.0 V
U302-1, U303-1 0 to 2.5 V
Transfer Ratio: -315 V/V
Motor Speed Control Voltage TP316 2.5±0.05 V
Motor Speed Pulse TP309 120 to 140 Hz
Opto-interrupter Pulse TP310 4.5 to 6.5 Hz
Flow Sensor Input Voltage J306-2 0 to 5 V
TP313 Transfer Ratio: 2 V/V
O2 Sensor Output Voltage, O2 Signal J307-10 0 to 0.25 V
TP314 Transfer Ratio: 0.1 V/V
O2 Sensor Output Voltage, J307-14 0 to +0.62 V
Temperature Signal TP315 Transfer Ratio: 0.25 V/V
Pressure Transducer Supply Voltage TP601, J601-1 10.0±0.05 V
Pressure Transducer Signal J601-2, J601-3 0 to 100 mV
(differential) TP602 Transfer Ratio: 40 mV/V
Cell RTD Signal (PT100) TP603 0.000 to 1.895 V for 0 to 200 °C
1 Use an oscilloscope to observe.

Appendix C – Drawings, Board LEDs (States), and Test Points | C-3


Customer I/O Board (100-2481)

Customer I/O Board Status Relay and Contact LEDs:


Current States
LED on
Relay Customer I/O board LED State
Status Relay 1 D1
Status Relay 2 D6 ON (GREEN)=energized
OFF=de-energized
Status Relay 3 D7 Note: Relays 4,5 not available for
Status Relay 4 D8 M9900RM Analyzers.
Status Relay 5 D9
Contact 1 D2 White=Contact Closed
Contact 2 D3 Black=Contact Open
Contact 3 D4 Note: Contacts 3,4 not available for
M9900RM Analyzers.
Contact 4 D5
Note: Corresponding indicator lights for each Status Relay and Contact can be viewed on the
Diagnostic menu (on the HMI). See Chapter 6 for more information.

C-4 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Customer Connections (100-2421-18)
ANALYZER CONNECTIONS CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS
ANALYZER STATUS ALARM
TB4

TB-A
ANALYZER CALIBRATION STATUS

TB3
DRY CONTACT INPUTS

TB2

ANALOG OUTPUTS

HMI

TB1
RS-485 COMMUNICATION

TB7
RELAY CONTACTS

TB6
DRY CONTACT INPUTS

Appendix C – Drawings, Board LEDs (States), and Test Points | C-5


PMT Supply Board (100-2226)

PMT Signal Board (100-2227)

C-6 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


AC Power Distribution/MOV Board (100-2450)

Ground Board (100-2235)

Appendix C – Drawings, Board LEDs (States), and Test Points | C-7


Filter Wheel Motor Cable, Connector Detail (100-2273-9)

Analyzer Rear Panel Layouts (GP, Div 2/Zone 2) (100-2421-1F)

C-8 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


HMI Connectivity, Rear/Bottom Views

USB2

24 VDC Display
USB1
Power Connector

COM1 RJ45 Port


D-sub 9-pin Connector
(Ethernet Plug to Display,
(Not Used)
from Optical Bench)
Ethernet Port (connects cable
to Ethernet on Rear Panel, or
to optional Gateway Module)

 The Ethernet Port on the bottom of the HMI is shown for information
purposes only. The customer Ethernet connection is on the analyzer
NOTE
Rear Panel. See drawing “Analyzer Rear Panel Layouts (GP, Div 2/
Zone 2) (100-2421-1F)” in this appendix.

Appendix C – Drawings, Board LEDs (States), and Test Points | C-9


Lamp Maintenance Diagram, Motorized Filter (Multi-Species)
Optical Bench (100-2421-1B)

C-10 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


Lamp Maintenance Diagram, Motorless Filter (Single Species)
Optical Bench (100-2421-1H)

Appendix C – Drawings, Board LEDs (States), and Test Points | C-11


BENCH HEATER PLUG
(CONNECT TO J604 OF
BENCH BOARD)
(100-2421-1G)

C-12 | Model 9900RM Analyzer


OPTICAL BENCH
HEATER
120V - (100-2437)
240V - (100-2438)

OPTICAL BENCH
OVERTEMP SWITCH
(301-3329)

TEMP TRANSISTOR PLUG


(CONNECT TO J603
OF BENCH BOARD)
Optical Bench Heater, Overtemp Switch, and RTD Locations

TEMP TRANSISTOR
(100-2436)
(THREADED INTO
UNDERSIDE OF
PMT PLATE)
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

This section consists of documents that are not part of the main manual,
but which describe and illustrate installation, operation, layout, and mainte-
nance procedures for non-standard or optional equipment – and derivative
analyzer models – that make up your analyzer and its sample system.

If you order a hard copy of the analyzer User Manual, this information will
be included in this section. If you receive only the standard Analyzer Docu-
mentation Package CD (all files in PDF format), this information is included
in the Supplemental Information folder on the CD. “Supplemental Infor-
mation – Where Can I Find It?” in Chapter 1 describes these documents.

This section can include:

• Manual Supplements

• 9900_CFG Report

• 9900_Signed Final QC (Quality Control) document

• S9900_HMI Menu Map

• Documents for optional components such as O2 Sensor.

• Other customer-specific information may also be included (if appli-


cable), such as Product Data Sheets, a Custom Spare Parts list, or analyzer
Certificates.

Supplemental Information | S-1


This page intentionally left blank.

S-2 | Model 9900RM Analyzer

Potrebbero piacerti anche